Dual-acting antihypertensive agents

ABSTRACT

In one aspect, the invention relates to compounds having the formula: 
                         
wherein: Ar, r, Z, X, R 3 , and R 5-7  are as defined in the specification, or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof. These compounds have AT 1  receptor antagonist activity and neprilysin inhibition activity. In another aspect, the invention relates to pharmaceutical compositions comprising such compounds; methods of using such compounds; and process and intermediates for preparing such compounds.

CROSS-REFERENCE TO RELATED APPLICATIONS

This application is a continuation of U.S. Ser. No. 13/298,493, filed on Nov. 17, 2011, now allowed; which is a continuation of U.S. Ser. No. 12/949,114, filed on Nov. 18, 2010, and issued as U.S. Pat. No. 8,080,572; which is a continuation of U.S. Ser. No. 12/507,995, filed on Jul. 23, 2009, and issued as U.S. Pat. No. 7,863,309; which claims the benefit of U.S. Provisional Application No. 61/135,806, filed on Jul. 24, 2008; the entire disclosures of which are incorporated herein by reference in their entirety.

BACKGROUND OF THE INVENTION

1. Field of the Invention

The present invention relates to novel compounds having angiotensin II type 1 (AT₁) receptor antagonist activity and neprilysin-inhibition activity. The invention also relates to pharmaceutical compositions comprising such compounds, processes and intermediates for preparing such compounds and methods of using such compounds to treat diseases such as hypertension.

2. State of the Art

The aim of antihypertensive therapy is to lower blood pressure and prevent hypertension-related complications such as myocardial infarction, stroke, and renal disease. For patients with uncomplicated hypertension (that is, no risk factors, target organ damage, or cardiovascular disease), it is hoped that reducing blood pressure will prevent development of cardiovascular and renal comorbidities, conditions that exist at the same time as the primary condition in the same patient. For those patients with existing risk factors or comorbidities, the therapeutic target is the slowing of comorbid disease progression and reduced mortality.

Physicians generally prescribe pharmacological therapies for patients whose blood pressure cannot be adequately controlled by dietary and/or lifestyle modifications. Commonly used therapeutic classes act to promote diuresis, adrenergic inhibition, or vasodilation. A combination of drugs is often prescribed, depending upon what comorbidities are present.

There are five common drug classes used to treat hypertension: diuretics, which include thiazide and thiazide-like diuretics such as hydrochlorothiazide, loop diuretics such as furosemide, and potassium-sparing diuretics such as triamterene; β₁ adrenergic receptor blockers such as metoprolol succinate and carvedilol; calcium channel blockers such as amlodipine; angiotensin-converting enzyme (ACE) inhibitors such as captopril, benazepril, enalapril, enalaprilat, lisinopril, quinapril, and ramipril; and AT₁ receptor antagonists, also known as angiotensin II type 1 receptor blockers (ARBs), such as candesartan cilexetil, eprosartan, irbesartan, losartan, olmesartan medoxomil, telmisartan, and valsartan. Combinations of these drugs are also administered, for example, a calcium channel blocker (amlodipine) and an ACE inhibitor (benazepril), or a diuretic (hydrochlorothiazide) and an ACE inhibitor (enalapril). All of these drugs, when used appropriately, are effective in the treatment of hypertension. Nevertheless, both efficacy and tolerability should be further improved in new drugs targeting hypertension. Despite the availability of many treatment options, the recent National Health And Nutrition Examination Survey (NHANES) demonstrated that only about 50% of all treated patients with hypertension achieve adequate blood pressure control. Furthermore, poor patient compliance due to tolerability issues with available treatments further reduces treatment success.

In addition, each of the major classes of antihypertensive agents have some drawbacks. Diuretics can adversely affect lipid and glucose metabolism, and are associated with other side effects, including orthostatic hypotension, hypokalemia, and hyperuricemia. Beta blockers can cause fatigue, insomnia, and impotence; and some beta blockers can also cause reduced cardiac output and bradycardia, which may be undesirable in some patient groups. Calcium channel blockers are widely used but it is debatable as to how effectively these drugs reduce fatal and nonfatal cardiac events relative to other drug classes. ACE inhibitors can cause coughing, and rarer side effects include rash, angioedema, hyperkalemia, and functional renal failure. AT₁ receptor antagonists are equally effective as ACE inhibitors but without the high prevalence of cough.

Neprilysin (neutral endopeptidase, EC 3.4.24.11) (NEP), is an endothelial membrane bound Zn²⁺ metallopeptidase found in many tissues, including the brain, kidney, lungs, gastrointestinal tract, heart, and peripheral vasculature. NEP is responsible for the degradation and inactivation of a number of vasoactive peptides, such as circulating bradykinin and angiotensin peptides, as well as the natriuretic peptides, the latter of which have several effects including vasodilation and diuresis. Thus, NEP plays an important role in blood pressure homeostasis. NEP inhibitors have been studied as potential therapeutics, and include thiorphan, candoxatril, and candoxatrilat. In addition, compounds have also been designed that inhibit both NEP and ACE, and include omapatrilat, gempatrilat, and sampatrilat. Referred to as vasopeptidase inhibitors, this class of compounds are described in Robl et al. (1999) Exp. Opin. Ther. Patents 9(12): 1665-1677.

There may be an opportunity to increase anti-hypertensive efficacy when combining AT₁ receptor antagonism and NEP inhibition, as evidenced by AT₁ receptor antagonist/NEP inhibitor combinations described in WO 9213564 to Darrow et al (Schering Corporation); US20030144215 to Ksander et al.; Pu et al., Abstract presented at the Canadian Cardiovascular Congress (October 2004); and Gardiner et al. (2006) JPET 319:340-348; and WO 2007/045663 (Novartis AG) to Glasspool et al.

Recently, WO 2007/056546 (Novartis AG) to Feng et al. has described complexes of an AT₁ receptor antagonist and a NEP inhibitor, where an AT₁ receptor antagonist compound is non-covalently bound to a NEP inhibitor compound, or where the antagonist compound is linked via non-covalent bonding to the inhibitor compound.

In spite of the advances in the art, there remains a need for a highly efficacious monotherapy with multiple mechanisms of action leading to levels of blood pressure control that can currently only be achieved with combination therapy. Thus, although various hypertensive agents are known, and administered in various combinations, it would be highly desirable to provide compounds having both AT₁ receptor antagonist activity and NEP inhibition activity in the same molecule. Compounds possessing both of these activities are expected to be particularly useful as therapeutic agents since they would exhibit antihypertensive activity through two independent modes of action while having single molecule pharmacokinetics.

In addition, such dual-acting compounds are also expected to have utility to treat a variety of other diseases that can be treated by antagonizing the AT₁ receptor and/or inhibiting the NEP enzyme.

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION

The present invention provides novel compounds that have been found to possess AT₁ receptor antagonist activity and neprilysin (NEP) enzyme inhibition activity. Accordingly, compounds of the invention are expected to be useful and advantageous as therapeutic agents for treating conditions such as hypertension and heart failure.

One aspect of the invention relates to a compound of formula I:

wherein: Z is an imidazole or triazole selected from:

r is 0, 1 or 2;

Ar is selected from:

R¹ is selected from —COOR^(1a), —NHSO₂R^(1b), —SO₂NHR^(1d), —SO₂OH, —C(O)NH—SO₂R^(1c), —P(O)(OH)₂, —CN, —O—CH(R^(1e))—COOH, tetrazol-5-yl,

R^(1a) is H, —C₁₋₆ alkyl, —C₁₋₃alkylenearyl, —C₁₋₃ alkyleneheteroaryl, —C₃₋₇ cycloalkyl, —CH(C₁₋₄alkyl)OC(O)R^(1aa), —C₀₋₆alkylenemorpholine,

R^(1aa) is —O—C₁₋₆alkyl, —O—C₃₋₇cycloalkyl, —NR^(1ab)R^(1ac), or —CH(NH₂)CH₂COOCH₃; R^(1ab) and R^(1ac) are independently H, —C₁₋₆alkyl, or benzyl, or are taken together as —(CH₂)₃₋₆—; R^(1b) is R^(1c) or —NHC(O)R^(1c); R^(1c) is —C₁₋₆alkyl, —C₀₋₆alkylene-O—R^(1ca), —C₁₋₅alkylene-NR^(1cb)R^(1cc), —C₀₋₄alkylenearyl, or —C₀₋₄alkyleneheteroaryl; R^(1ca) is H, —C₁₋₆alkyl, or —C₁₋₆alkylene-O—C₁₋₆alkyl; R^(1cb) and R^(1cc) are independently H or —C₁₋₆alkyl, or are taken together as —(CH₂)₂—O—(CH₂)₂— or —(CH₂)₂—N[C(O)CH₃]—(CH₂)₂—; R^(1d) is H, R^(1c), —C(O)R^(1c), or —C(O)NHR^(1c); R^(1e) is —C₁₋₄alkyl or aryl;

R² is selected from H, halo, —NO₂, —C₁₋₆alkyl, —C₂₋₆alkenyl, —C₃₋₆cycloalkyl, —CN, —C(O)R^(2a), —C₀₋₅alkylene-OR^(2b), —C₀₋₅alkylene-NR^(2c)R^(2d), —C₀₋₃alkylenearyl, and —C₀₋₃alkylene-heteroaryl; where R^(2a) is H, —C₁₋₆alkyl, —C₃₋₆cycloalkyl, —OR^(2b), or —NR^(2c)R^(2d); R^(2b) is H, —C₁₋₆alkyl, —C₃₋₆cycloalkyl, or —C₀₋₁alkylenearyl; and R^(2c) and R^(2d) are independently H, —C₁₋₄alkyl, or —C₀₋₁alkylenearyl;

R³ is selected from —C₁₋₁₀alkyl, —C₂₋₁₀alkenyl, —C₃₋₁₀alkynyl, —C₀₋₃alkylene-C₃₋₇cycloalkyl, —C₂₋₃alkenylene-C₃₋₇cycloalkyl, —C₂₋₃alkynylene-C₃₋₇cycloalkyl, —C₀₋₅alkylene-NR^(3a)—C₀₋₅alkylene-R^(3b), —C₀₋₅alkylene-O—C₀₋₅alkylene-R^(3b), —C₀₋₅alkylene-S—C₁₋₅alkylene-R^(3b), and —C₀₋₃alkylenearyl; where R^(3a) is H, —C₁₋₆alkyl, —C₃₋₇cycloalkyl, or —C₀₋₃alkylenearyl; and R^(3b) is H, —C₁₋₆alkyl, —C₃₋₇cycloalkyl, —C₂₋₄alkenyl, —C₂₋₄alkynyl, or aryl;

X is —C₁₋₁₂alkylene-, where at least one —CH₂— moiety in the alkylene is replaced with a —NR^(4a)—C(O)— or —C(O)—NR^(4a)— moiety, where R^(4a) is H, —OH, or —C₁₋₄alkyl;

R⁵ is selected from —C₀₋₃alkylene-SR^(5a), —C₀₋₃alkylene-C(O)NR^(5b)R^(5c), —C₀₋₃alkylene-NR^(5b)—C(O)R^(5d), —NH—C₀₋₁alkylene-P(O)(OR^(5e))₂, —C₀₋₃alkylene-P(O)OR^(5e)R^(5f), —C₀₋₂alkylene-CHR^(5g)—COOH, —C₀₋₃alkylene-C(O)NR^(5h)—CHR^(5i)—COOH, and —C₀₋₃alkylene-S—SR^(5j); R^(5a) is H or —C(O)—R^(5aa); R^(5aa) is —C₁₋₆alkyl, —C₀₋₆alkylene-C₃₋₇cycloalkyl, —C₀₋₆alkylenearyl, —C₀₋₆alkyleneheteroaryl, —C₀₋₆alkylenemorpholine, —C₀₋₆alkylenepiperazine-CH₃, —CH[N(R^(5ab))₂]-aa where aa is an amino acid side chain, -2-pyrrolidine, —C₀₋₆alkylene-OR^(5ab), —O—C₀₋₆alkylenearyl, —C₁₋₂alkylene-OC(O)—C₁₋₆alkyl, —C₁₋₂alkylene-OC(O)—C₀₋₆alkylenearyl, or —O—C₁₋₂alkylene-OC(O)O—C₁₋₆alkyl; R^(5ab) is H or —C₁₋₆alkyl; R^(5b) is H, —OH, —OC(O)R^(5ba), —CH₂COOH, —O-benzyl, pyridyl, or —OC(S)NR^(5bb)R^(5bc); R^(5ba) is H, —C₁₋₆alkyl, aryl, —OCH₂-aryl, —CH₂O-aryl, or —NR^(5bb)R^(5bc); R^(5bb) and R^(5bc) are independently H or —C₁₋₄alkyl; R^(5c) is H, —C₁₋₆alkyl, or —C(O)—R^(5ca); R^(5ca) is H, —C₁₋₆alkyl, —C₃₋₇cycloalkyl, aryl, or heteroaryl; R^(5d) is H, —C₁₋₄alkyl, —C₀₋₃alkylenearyl, —NR^(5da)R^(5db), —CH₂SH, or —O—C₁₋₆alkyl; R^(5da) and R^(5db) are independently H or —C₁₋₄alkyl; R^(5e) is H, —C₁₋₆alkyl, —C₁₋₃alkylenearyl, —C₁₋₃alkyleneheteroaryl, —C₃₋₇cycloalkyl, —CH(CH₃)—O—C(O)R^(5ea),

R^(5ea) is —O—C₁₋₆alkyl, —O—C₃₋₇cycloalkyl, —NR^(5eb)R^(5ec), or —CH(NH₂)CH₂COOCH₃; R^(5eb) and R^(5ec) are independently H, —C₁₋₄alkyl, or —C₁₋₃alkylenearyl, or are taken together as —(CH₂)₃₋₆—; R^(5f) is H, —C₁₋₄alkyl, —C₁₋₃alkylenearyl, —C₁₋₃alkylene-NR^(5fa)R^(5fb), or —C₁₋₃alkylene(aryl)-C₀₋₃alkylene-NR^(5fa)R^(5fb); R^(5fa) and R^(5fb) are independently H or —C₁₋₄alkyl; R^(5g) is H, —OH, —C₁₋₆alkyl, —C₁₋₃alkylenearyl, or —CH₂—O—(CH₂)₂—O—CH₃; R^(5h) is H or —C₁₋₄alkyl; R^(5i) is H, —C₁₋₄alkyl, or —C₀₋₃alkylenearyl; and R^(5j) is —C₁₋₆alkyl, aryl, or —CH₂CH(NH₂)COOH;

R⁶ is selected from —C₁₋₆alkyl, —CH₂—O—(CH₂)₂—O—CH₃, —C₁₋₆alkylene-O—C₁₋₆alkyl, —C₀₋₃alkylenearyl, —C₀₋₃alkyleneheteroaryl, and —C₀₋₃alkylene-C₃₋₇cycloalkyl; and

R⁷ is H or is taken together with R⁶ to form —C₃₋₈cycloalkyl;

wherein:

each —CH₂— group in —(CH₂)_(r)— is optionally substituted with 1 or 2 substituents independently selected from —C₁₋₄alkyl and fluoro;

each ring in Ar and each aryl and heteroaryl in R¹⁻³ and R⁵⁻⁶ is optionally substituted with 1 to 3 substituents independently selected from —OH, —C₁₋₆alkyl, —C₂₋₄alkenyl, —C₂₋₄alkynyl, —CN, halo, —O—C₁₋₆alkyl, —S—C₁₋₆alkyl, —S(O)—C₁₋₆alkyl, —S(O)₂—C₁₋₄alkyl, phenyl, —NO₂, —NH₂, —NH—C₁₋₆alkyl, and —N(C₁₋₆alkyl)₂, wherein each alkyl, alkenyl and alkynyl is optionally substituted with 1 to 5 fluoro atoms;

each carbon atom in X is optionally substituted with one or more R^(4b) groups and one —CH₂— moiety in X may be replaced with a group selected from —C₃₋₈cycloalkylene-, —CR^(4d)═CH—, and —CH═CR^(4d)—; where R^(4b) is —C₀₋₅alkylene-COOR^(4c), —C₁₋₆alkyl, —C₀₋₁alkylene-CONH₂, —C₁₋₂alkylene-OH, —C₀₋₃alkylene-C₁₋₇cycloalkyl, 1H-indol-3-yl, benzyl, or hydroxybenzyl; R^(4c) is H or —C₁₋₄alkyl; and R^(4d) is —CH₂-2-thiophene or phenyl;

each alkyl and each aryl in R¹⁻³, R^(4a-4d), and R⁵⁻⁶ is optionally substituted with 1 to 7 fluoro atoms; or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof.

Another aspect of the invention relates to pharmaceutical compositions comprising a pharmaceutically acceptable carrier and a compound of the invention. Such compositions may optionally contain other therapeutic agents such as diuretics, β₁ adrenergic receptor blockers, calcium channel blockers, angiotensin-converting enzyme inhibitors, AT₁ receptor antagonists, neprilysin inhibitors, non-steroidal anti-inflammatory agents, prostaglandins, anti-lipid agents, anti-diabetic agents, anti-thrombotic agents, renin inhibitors, endothelin receptor antagonists, endothelin converting enzyme inhibitors, aldosterone antagonists, angiotensin-converting enzyme/neprilysin inhibitors, vasopressin receptor antagonists, and combinations thereof. Accordingly, in yet another aspect of the invention, a pharmaceutical composition comprises a compound of the invention, a second therapeutic agent, and a pharmaceutically acceptable carrier. Another aspect of the invention relates to a combination of active agents, comprising a compound of the invention and a second therapeutic agent. The compound of the invention can be formulated together or separately from the additional agent(s). When formulated separately, a pharmaceutically acceptable carrier may be included with the additional agent(s). Thus, yet another aspect of the invention relates to a combination of pharmaceutical compositions, the combination comprising: a first pharmaceutical composition comprising a compound of the invention and a first pharmaceutically acceptable carrier; and a second pharmaceutical composition comprising a second therapeutic agent and a second pharmaceutically acceptable carrier. In another aspect, the invention relates to a kit containing such pharmaceutical compositions, for example where the first and second pharmaceutical compositions are separate pharmaceutical compositions.

Compounds of the invention possess both AT₁ receptor antagonist activity and NEP enzyme inhibition activity, and are therefore expected to be useful as therapeutic agents for treating patients suffering from a disease or disorder that is treated by antagonizing the AT₁ receptor and/or inhibiting the NEP enzyme. Thus, one aspect of the invention relates to a method of treating patients suffering from a disease or disorder that is treated by antagonizing the AT₁ receptor and/or inhibiting the NEP enzyme, comprising administering to a patient a therapeutically effective amount of a compound of the invention. Another aspect of the invention relates to a method of treating hypertension or heart failure, comprising administering to a patient a therapeutically effective amount of a compound of the invention. Still another aspect of the invention relates to a method for antagonizing an AT₁ receptor in a mammal comprising administering to the mammal, an AT₁ receptor-antagonizing amount of a compound of the invention. Yet another aspect of the invention relates to a method for inhibiting a NEP enzyme in a mammal comprising administering to the mammal, a NEP enzyme-inhibiting amount of a compound of the invention.

Compounds of the invention that are of particular interest include those that exhibit an inhibitory constant (pK_(i)) for binding to an AT₁ receptor greater than or equal to about 5.0; in particular those having a pK_(i) greater than or equal to about 6.0; in one embodiment those having a pK_(i) greater than or equal to about 7.0; more particularly those having a pK_(i) greater than or equal to about 8.0; and in yet another embodiment, those having a pK_(i) within the range of about 8.0-10.0. Compounds of particular interest also include those having a NEP enzyme inhibitory concentration (pIC₅₀) greater than or equal to about 5.0; in one embodiment those having a pIC₅₀ greater than or equal to about 6.0; in particular those having a pIC₅₀ greater than or equal to about 7.0; and most particularly those having a pIC₅₀ within the range of about 7.0-10.0. Compounds of further interest include those having a pK_(i) for binding to an AT₁ receptor greater than or equal to about 7.5 and having a NEP enzyme pIC₅₀ greater than or equal to about 7.0.

Since compounds of the invention possess AT₁ receptor antagonist activity and NEP inhibition activity, such compounds are also useful as research tools. Accordingly, one aspect of the invention relates to a method of using a compound of the invention as a research tool, the method comprising conducting a biological assay using a compound of the invention. Compounds of the invention can also be used to evaluate new chemical compounds. Thus another aspect of the invention relates to a method of evaluating a test compound in a biological assay, comprising: (a) conducting a biological assay with a test compound to provide a first assay value; (b) conducting the biological assay with a compound of the invention to provide a second assay value; wherein step (a) is conducted either before, after or concurrently with step (b); and (c) comparing the first assay value from step (a) with the second assay value from step (b). Exemplary biological assays include an AT₁ receptor binding assay and a NEP enzyme inhibition assay. Still another aspect of the invention relates to a method of studying a biological system or sample comprising an AT₁ receptor, a NEP enzyme, or both, the method comprising: (a) contacting the biological system or sample with a compound of the invention; and (b) determining the effects caused by the compound on the biological system or sample.

Yet another aspect of the invention relates to processes and intermediates useful for preparing compounds of the invention. Accordingly, another aspect of the invention relates to a process of preparing compounds of the invention comprising the step of coupling a compound of formula 1 with a compound of formula 2:

where: A is —NH₂ and B is —COOH or A is —COOH and B is —NH₂; the sum of a and b is in the range of 0 to 11; Ar* represents Ar—R^(1*), where R^(1*) is R¹ or a protected form of R′; and R^(5*) represents R⁵ or a protected form of R⁵; the carbon atoms in the —(CH₂)_(a) and —(CH₂)_(b) groups may be substituted with one or more R^(4b) groups; and one —CH₂— group in the —(CH₂)_(a) or the —(CH₂)_(b) group may be replaced with —C₃₋₈cycloalkylene-, —CR^(4d)═CH—, or —CH═CR^(4d)—; and optionally deprotecting the product when R^(1*) is a protected form of R¹ and/or R^(5*) is a protected form of R⁵. Another aspect of the invention relates to a process of preparing a pharmaceutically acceptable salt of a compound of formula I, comprising contacting a compound of formula I in free acid or base form with a pharmaceutically acceptable base or acid. In other aspects, the invention relates to products prepared by any of the processes described herein, as well as novel intermediates used in such process. In one aspect of the invention novel intermediates have formula IV, V or VI, as defined herein.

Yet another aspect of the invention relates to the use of a compound of formula I or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof, for the manufacture of a medicament, especially for the manufacture of a medicament useful for treating hypertension or heart failure. Another aspect of the invention relates to use of a compound of the invention for antagonizing an AT₁ receptor or for inhibiting a NEP enzyme in a mammal. Still another aspect of the invention relates to the use of a compound of the invention as a research tool. Other aspects and embodiments of the invention are disclosed herein.

DETAILED DESCRIPTION OF THE INVENTION

In one aspect, the invention relates to compounds of formula I:

or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof.

As used herein, the term “compound of the invention” includes all compounds encompassed by formula I such as the species embodied in formulas II, IIa, IIb, IIc, IId, III, IIIa, and IIIb. In addition, the compounds of the invention may also contain several basic or acidic groups (for example, amino or carboxyl groups) and therefore, such compounds can exist as a free base, free acid, or in various salt forms. All such salt forms are included within the scope of the invention. Furthermore, the compounds of the invention may also exist as prodrugs. Accordingly, those skilled in the art will recognize that reference to a compound herein, for example, reference to a “compound of the invention” or a “compound of formula I” includes a compound of formula I as well as pharmaceutically acceptable salts and prodrugs of that compound unless otherwise indicated. Further, the term “or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt and/or prodrug thereof” is intended to include all permutations of salts and prodrugs, such as a pharmaceutically acceptable salt of a prodrug. Furthermore, solvates of compounds of formula I are included within the scope of this invention.

The compounds of formula I may contain one or more chiral centers and therefore, these compounds may be prepared and used in various stereoisomeric forms. Accordingly, the invention relates to racemic mixtures, pure stereoisomers (enantiomers or diastereomers), stereoisomer-enriched mixtures, and the like unless otherwise indicated. When a chemical structure is depicted herein without any stereochemistry, it is understood that all possible stereoisomers are encompassed by such structure. Thus, for example, the term “compound of formula I” is intended to include all possible stereoisomers of the compound. Similarly, when a particular stereoisomer is shown or named herein, it will be understood by those skilled in the art that minor amounts of other stereoisomers may be present in the compositions of the invention unless otherwise indicated, provided that the utility of the composition as a whole is not eliminated by the presence of such other isomers. Individual enantiomers may be obtained by numerous methods that are well known in the art, including chiral chromatography using a suitable chiral stationary phase or support, or by chemically converting them into diastereomers, separating the diastereomers by conventional means such as chromatography or recrystallization, then regenerating the original enantiomers. Additionally, where applicable, all cis-trans or E/Z isomers (geometric isomers), tautomeric forms and topoisomeric forms of the compounds of the invention are included within the scope of the invention unless otherwise specified.

One possible chiral center could be present in the “X” portion of compounds of formula I. For example, a chiral center exists at a carbon atom in the alkylene moiety in X that is substituted with an R^(4b) group such as —C₁₋₆alkyl, for example —CH₃. This chiral center is present at the carbon atom indicated by the symbol * in the following partial formula:

Another possible chiral center could be present at the carbon on the —X—CR⁵R⁶R⁷ group, when R⁶ is a group such as —C₁₋₆alkyl, for example —CH₂CH(CH₃)₂, and R⁷ is hydrogen. This chiral center is present at the carbon atom indicated by the symbol ** in the following formula:

In one embodiment of the invention, the carbon atom identified by the symbol * and/or ** has the (R) configuration. In this embodiment, compounds of formula I have the (R) configuration at the carbon atom identified by the symbol * and/or ** or are enriched in a stereoisomeric form having the (R) configuration at this carbon atom (or atoms). In another embodiment, the carbon atom identified by the symbol * and/or ** has the (S) configuration. In this embodiment, compounds of formula I have the (S) configuration at the carbon atom identified by the symbol * and/or ** or are enriched in a stereoisomeric form having the (S) configuration at this carbon atom. It is understood that a compound may have a chiral center at both the * and the ** carbon atoms. In such cases, four possible diastereomers can exist. In some cases, in order to optimize the therapeutic activity of the compounds of the invention, for example, as hypertensive agents, it may be desirable that the carbon atom identified by the symbol * and/or ** have a particular (R) or (S) configuration.

The compounds of the invention, as well as those compounds used in their synthesis, may also include isotopically-labeled compounds, that is, where one or more atoms have been enriched with atoms having an atomic mass different from the atomic mass predominately found in nature. Examples of isotopes that may be incorporated into the compounds of formula I, for example, include, but are not limited to, ²H, ³H, ¹³C, ¹⁴C, ¹⁵N, ¹⁸O, ¹⁷O, ³⁵S, ³⁶Cl, and ¹⁸F.

The compounds of formula I have been found to possess AT₁ receptor antagonizing activity and NEP enzyme inhibition activity. Among other properties, such compounds are expected to be useful as therapeutic agents for treating diseases such as hypertension. By combining dual activity into a single compound, double therapy can be achieved, that is, AT₁ receptor antagonist activity and NEP enzyme inhibition activity can be obtained using a single active component. Since pharmaceutical compositions containing one active component are typically easier to formulate than compositions containing two active components, such single-component compositions provide a significant advantage over compositions containing two active components. In addition, certain compounds of the invention have also been found to be selective for inhibition of the AT₁ receptor over the angiotensin II type 2 (AT₂) receptor, a property that may have therapeutic advantages.

The nomenclature used herein to name the compounds of the invention is illustrated in the Examples herein. This nomenclature has been derived using the commercially available AutoNom software (MDL, San Leandro, Calif.).

Representative Embodiments

The following substituents and values are intended to provide representative examples of various aspects and embodiments of the invention. These representative values are intended to further define and illustrate such aspects and embodiments and are not intended to exclude other embodiments or to limit the scope of the invention. In this regard, the representation that a particular value or substituent is preferred is not intended in any way to exclude other values or substituents from the invention unless specifically indicated.

In one aspect, the invention relates to compounds of formula I:

Z represents is an imidazole or triazole selected from:

Thus, the compounds of the invention can also be depicted as formulas II-VI:

The values for r are 0, 1 or 2. In one embodiment, r is 1. Each —CH₂— group in the —(CH₂)_(r)— group may be substituted with 1 or 2 substituents independently selected from —C₁₋₄alkyl (for example, —CH₃), and fluoro. In one particular embodiment, the —(CH₂)_(r)— group is unsubstituted; in another embodiment, one or two —CH₂— groups in —(CH₂)_(r)— are substituted with a —C₁₋₄alkyl group.

Ar represents an aryl group selected from:

Each ring in the Ar moiety may be substituted with 1 to 3 substituents independently selected from —OH, —C₁₋₆alkyl, —C₂₋₄alkenyl, —C₂₋₄alkynyl, —CN, halo, —O—C₁₋₆alkyl, —S—C₁₋₆alkyl, —S(O)—C₁₋₆alkyl, —S(O)₂—C₁₋₄alkyl, phenyl, —NO₂, —NH₂, —NH—C₁₋₆alkyl and —N(C₁₋₆alkyl)₂. Furthermore, each of the aforementioned alkyl, alkenyl and alkynyl groups are optionally substituted with 1 to 5 fluoro atoms.

In one particular embodiment, each ring in the Ar moiety may be substituted with 1 to 2 substituents independently selected from —OH, —C₁₋₄alkyl (for example, —CH₃), halo (for example, bromo, fluoro, chloro, and di-fluoro), —O—C₁₋₄alkyl (for example, —OCH₃), and phenyl. Exemplary substituted Ar moieties include:

Of particular interest is where Ar is substituted with 1 or 2 halo atoms, particularly fluoro atoms.

It is understood that:

In one particular embodiment, Ar is selected from:

R¹ is selected from —COOR^(1a), —NHSO₂R^(1b), —SO₂NHR^(1d), —SO₂OH, —C(O)NH—SO₂R^(1c), —P(O)(OH)₂, —CN, —O—CH(R^(1e))—COOH, tetrazol-5-yl,

The R^(1a) moiety is H, —C₁₋₆ alkyl, —C₁₋₃alkylenearyl, —C₁₋₃alkyleneheteroaryl, —C₃₋₇ cycloalkyl, —CH(C₁₋₄alkyl)OC(O)R^(1aa), —C₀₋₆alkylenemorpholine,

R^(1aa) is —O—C₁₋₆alkyl, —O—C₃₋₇cycloalkyl, —NR^(1ab)R^(1ac), or —CH(NH₂)CH₂COOCH₃. R^(1ab) and R^(1ac) are independently H, —C₁₋₆alkyl, or benzyl, or are taken together as —(CH₂)₃₋₆—.

The R^(1b) moiety is R^(1c) or —NHC(O)R^(1c). The R^(1c) group is —C₁₋₆alkyl, —C₀₋₆alkylene-O—R^(1ca), —C₁₋₅alkylene-NR^(1cb)R^(1cc), or —C₀₋₄alkylenearyl. The R^(1ca) moiety is H, —C₁₋₆alkyl, or —C₁₋₆alkylene-O—C₁₋₆alkyl. The R^(1cb) and R^(1cc) groups are independently H or —C₁₋₆alkyl, or are taken together as —(CH₂)₂—O—(CH₂)₂— or —(CH₂)₂—N[C(O)CH₃]—(CH₂)₂—. The R^(1d) moiety is H, R^(1c), —C(O)R^(1c), or —C(O)NHR^(1c). The R^(1c) group is C₁₋₄alkyl or aryl.

Each alkyl and each aryl in R¹ is optionally substituted with 1 to 7 fluoro atoms. In addition, the term “alkyl” is intended to include divalent alkylene groups such as those present in —C₁₋₃alkylenearyl and —C₁₋₃alkyleneheteroaryl, for example. Further, each aryl and heteroaryl group that might be present in R¹, may be substituted with 1 to 3-OH, —C₁₋₆ alkyl, —C₂₋₄alkenyl, —C₂₋₄alkynyl, —CN, halo, —O—C₁₋₆ alkyl, —S—C₁₋₆ alkyl, —S(O)—C₁₋₆ alkyl, —S(O)₂—C₁₋₄ alkyl, phenyl, —NO₂, —NH₂, —NH—C₁₋₆ alkyl, or —N(C₁₋₆ alkyl)₂ groups. Further, each of the aforementioned alkyl, alkenyl and alkynyl groups may be substituted with 1 to 5 fluoro atoms. It is understood that when referring to “each alkyl,” “each aryl” and “each heteroaryl” group in R¹, the terms also include any alkyl, aryl and heteroaryl groups that might be present in the R^(1a) through R^(1c) moieties.

In one embodiment, R¹ is —COOR^(1a) and R^(1a) is H. In another embodiment, R¹ is —COOR^(1a) and R^(1a) is —C₁₋₆alkyl, examples of which include —CH₃, —CH₂CH₃, —(CH₂)₂CH₃, —(CH₂)₂—CF₃, —CH₂CH(CH₃)₂, —CH(CH₃)₂, —CH(CH₃)—CF₃, —CH(CH₂F)₂, —C(CH₃)₃, —(CH₂)₃CH₃, and —(CH₂)₂—CF₂CF₃. Thus, examples of R¹ include —C(O)OCH₃, —COOCH₂CH₃, and so forth.

In one embodiment, R¹ is —COOR^(1a) and R^(1a) is —C₁₋₃alkylenearyl, for example, a benzyl group, which may be substituted such as chlorobenzyl, fluorobenzyl, difluorobenzyl, -benzyl-CH₃, -benzyl-CF₃, and -benzyl-O—CF₃. Thus, examples of R¹ include: —C(O)OCH₂-benzyl,

In one embodiment, R¹ is —COOR^(1a) and R^(1a) is —C₁₋₃alkyleneheteroaryl, examples of which include —CH₂-pyridinyl. In one embodiment, R¹ is —COOR^(1a) and R^(1a) is —C₃₋₇cycloalkyl, examples of which include cyclopentyl.

In yet another embodiment R¹ is —COOR^(1a) and R^(1a) is —CH(C₁₋₄alkyl)OC(O)R^(1aa), where R^(1aa) is —O—C₁₋₆alkyl, —O—C₃₋₇cycloalkyl, —NR^(1ab)R^(1ac), or —CH(NH₂)CH₂COOCH₃. R^(1ab) and R^(1ac) are independently H, —C₁₋₆alkyl, or benzyl, or are taken together as —(CH₂)₃₋₆—. Examples of —O—C₁₋₆alkyl groups include —O—CH₂CH₃ and —O—CH(CH₃)₂. Exemplary —O—C₃₋₇cycloalkyl groups include —O-cyclohexyl. Thus, examples of R¹ include —C(O)OCH(CH₃)OC(O)—O—CH₂CH₃, —C(O)OCH(CH₃)OC(O)—O—CH(CH₃)₂, and —C(O)OCH(CH₃)OC(O)—O-cyclohexyl.

In one embodiment, R¹ is —COOR^(1a) and R^(1a) is —C₀₋₆alkylenemorpholine, examples of which include —(CH₂)₂-morpholine and —(CH₂)₃-morpholine. In another embodiment, R^(1a) is

In one embodiment, R¹ is —NHSO₂R^(1b) and R^(1b) is R^(1c). The R^(1c) group is —C₁₋₆alkyl, —C₀₋₆alkylene-O—R^(1ca), —C₁₋₅alkylene-NR^(1cb)R^(1cc), —C₀₋₄alkylenearyl or —C₀₋₄alkyleneheteroaryl. The R^(1ca) moiety is H, —C₁₋₆alkyl, or —C₁₋₆alkylene-O—C₁₋₆alkyl. The R^(1cb) and R^(1cc) groups are independently H or —C₁₋₆alkyl, or are taken together as —(CH₂)₂—O—(CH₂)₂— or —(CH₂)₂—N[C(O)CH₃]—(CH₂)₂—. In one embodiment, R^(1c) is —C₁₋₆alkyl, such that exemplary R¹ groups include —NHSO₂—CH₃ and the fluoro-substituted group, —NHSO₂—CF₃. In another embodiment, R^(1c) is —C₀₋₄alkylenearyl, such that exemplary R¹ groups include —NHSO₂-phenyl. In another embodiment, R^(1c) is —C₀₋₄alkyleneheteroaryl, such that exemplary R¹ groups include —NHSO₂-4,5-dimethylisoxazol-3-yl.

In another embodiment, R¹ is —NHSO₂R^(1b) and R^(1b) is —NHC(O)R^(1c), where R^(1c) is defined above. In a particular embodiment, R¹ is —NHSO₂R^(1b), R^(1b) is —NHC(O)R^(1c), and R^(1c) is —C₁₋₆alkyl or —C₀₋₄alkylenearyl.

In one embodiment, R¹ is —SO₂NHR^(1d) and R^(1d) is H. In another embodiment, R¹ is —SO₂NHR^(1d) and R^(1d) is R^(1c) is defined above. In a particular embodiment, R^(1c) is —C₁₋₆alkyl or —C₀₋₄alkylenearyl. When R^(1c) is —C₁₋₆alkyl, exemplary R¹ groups include the fluoro-substituted groups —SO₂NH—CF₃, —SO₂NH—CHF₂, —SO₂NH—CF₂CH₂F and —SO₂NH—CF₂CF₂CF₃.

In another embodiment, R¹ is —SO₂NHR^(1d) and R^(1d) is —C(O)R^(1c), where R^(1c) is defined above. In one embodiment of particular interest, R^(1c) is —C₁₋₆alkyl or —C₀₋₄alkylenearyl. When R^(1c) is —C₁₋₆alkyl, exemplary R¹ groups include —SO₂NHC(O)CH₃ and —SO₂NHC(O)—(CH₂)₂CH₃. When R^(1c) is —C₀₋₆alkylene-O—R^(1ca) and R^(1ca) is H, exemplary R¹ groups include —SO₂NHC(O)CH₂OH, —SO₂NHC(O)CH(CH₃)OH, and —SO₂NHC(O)C(CH₃)₂OH. When R^(1c) is —C₀₋₆alkylene-O—R^(1ca) and R^(1ca) is —C₁₋₆alkyl, exemplary R¹ groups include —SO₂NHC(O)CH₂—O—CH₃, —SO₂NHC(O)—O—CH₃, and —SO₂NHC(O)—O—CH₂CH₃. When R^(1c) is —C₀₋₆alkylene-O—R^(1ca) and R^(1ca) is —C₁₋₆alkylene-O—C₁₋₆alkyl, exemplary R¹ groups include —SO₂NHC(O)CH₂—O—(CH₂)₂—O—CH₃. When R_(1c) is —C₁₋₅alkylene-NR^(1cb)R^(1cc), exemplary R¹ groups include —SO₂NHC(O)CH₂N(CH₃)₂, —SO₂NHC(O)—CH₂—NH₂, and —SO₂NHC(O)—CH(CH₃)—NH₂. Another example when R^(1c) is —C₁₋₅alkylene-NR^(1cb)R^(1cc) is where the R^(1cb) and R^(1cc) are taken together as —(CH₂)₂—O—(CH₂)₂— or —(CH₂)₂—N[C(O)CH₃]—(CH₂)₂—. Such exemplary R¹ groups include:

In another embodiment, R¹ is —SO₂NHR^(1d) and R^(1d) is —C(O)NHR^(1c), where R^(1c) is defined above. In a particular embodiment, R^(1c) is —C₁₋₆alkyl or —C₀₋₄alkylenearyl. When R^(1c) is —C₁₋₆alkyl, exemplary R¹ groups include —SO₂NHC(O)NH—CH₂CH₃ and —SO₂NHC(O)NH—(CH₂)₂CH₃. When R^(1c) is —C₀₋₄alkylenearyl, exemplary R¹ groups include —SO₂NHC(O)NH-phenyl.

In another embodiment, R¹ is —SO₂OH, and in still another embodiment, R¹ is —P(O)(OH)₂. In yet another embodiment, R¹ is —CN.

In another embodiment, R¹ is —C(O)NH—SO₂R^(1c), where R^(1c) is defined above. In a particular embodiment, R^(1c) is —C₁₋₆alkyl or —C₀₋₄alkylenearyl. When R^(1c) is —C₁₋₆alkyl, exemplary R¹ groups include —C(O)—NH—SO₂—CH₃, —C(O)—NH—SO₂—CH₂CH₃ and the fluoro-substituted —C(O)—NH—SO₂—CF₃ group.

In another embodiment, R¹ is —O—CH(R^(1e))—COOH, where R^(1e) is —C₁₋₄alkyl or aryl. Examples of such R¹ groups include, —O—CH(CH₃)—COOH and —O—CH(phenyl)-COOH.

In an embodiment of particular interest, R¹ is tetrazol-5-yl. In another embodiment, R¹ is:

R² is selected from H, halo, —NO₂, —C₁₋₆alkyl, —C₂₋₆alkenyl, —C₃₋₆cycloalkyl, —CN, —C(O)R^(2a), —C₀₋₅ alkylene-OR^(2b), —C₀₋₅alkylene-NR^(2c)R^(2d), —C₀₋₃alkylenearyl, and —C₀₋₃alkyleneheteroaryl. In one particular embodiment, R² is selected from H, halo, and —C(O)R^(2a). In one embodiment R² is halo such as chloro or fluoro. In another embodiment R² is —C₁₋₆alkyl such as —CH₃ and —CH₂CH₃. In yet another embodiment R² is —C₀₋₃alkylenearyl, such as phenyl. In one embodiment, R² is —C(O)R^(2a). The R^(2a) substituent can be H, —C₁₋₆alkyl, —C₃₋₆cycloalkyl, —OR^(2b) or —NR^(2c)R^(2d). R^(2b) is selected from H, —C₁₋₆alkyl, —C₃₋₆cycloalkyl, and —C₀₋₁alkylenearyl. The R^(2c) and R^(2d) groups are independently H, —C₁₋₄ alkyl, or —C₀₋₁alkylenearyl.

In another particular embodiment, R² is —C(O)R^(2a), where R^(2a) is —OR^(2b) and R^(2b) is H, i.e., R² is —COOH. In another particular embodiment, R² is —C₀₋₅alkylene-OR^(2b), more particularly —C₀₋₃alkylene-OR^(2b). In exemplary embodiments, and R^(2b) is H or —C₁₋₆alkyl, for example R² can be —CH₂OH, —C(CH₃)₂OH or —OCH₃.

Each alkyl and each aryl in R² is optionally substituted with 1 to 7 fluoro atoms. It is understood that when referring to the “alkyl” in R², the term includes any alkyl groups that might be present in the R^(2a), R^(2b), R^(2c) and R^(2d) moieties. In addition, the aryl and heteroaryl in R², for example in —C₀₋₃alkylenearyl or —C₀₋₃alkyleneheteroaryl, may be substituted with 1 to 3-OH, —C₁₋₆alkyl, —C₂₋₄alkenyl, —C₂₋₄alkynyl, —CN, halo, —O—C₁₋₆alkyl, —S—C₁₋₆alkyl, —S(O)—C₁₋₆alkyl, —S(O)₂—C₁₋₄alkyl, phenyl, —NO₂, —NH₂, —NH—C₁₋₆alkyl, or —N(C₁₋₆alkyl)₂ groups. Further, each of the aforementioned alkyl, alkenyl and alkynyl groups may be substituted with 1 to 5 fluoro atoms. It is understood that when referring to the “aryl” or “heteroaryl” in R², the term includes any aryl and heteroaryl groups that might be present in the R^(2a), R^(2b), R^(2c) and R^(2d) moieties.

R³ is selected from —C₁₋₁₀alkyl, —C₂₋₁₀alkenyl, —C₃₋₁₀alkynyl, —C₀₋₃alkylene-C₃₋₇cycloalkyl, —C₂₋₃alkenylene-C₃₋₇cycloalkyl, —C₂₋₃alkynylene-C₃₋₇cycloalkyl, —C₀₋₅alkylene-NR^(3a)—C₀₋₅alkylene-R^(3b), —C₀₋₅alkylene-O—C₀₋₅alkylene-R^(3b), —C₀₋₅alkylene-S—C₁₋₅alkylene-R^(3b), and —C₀₋₃alkylenearyl. The R^(3a) group is H, —C₁₋₆alkyl, —C₃₋₇cycloalkyl, or —C₀₋₃alkylenearyl (for example, —C₀₋₁alkylenearyl such as phenyl and benzyl). The R^(3b) group is H, —C₁₋₆alkyl, —C₃₋₇cycloalkyl, —C₂₋₄alkenyl, —C₂₋₄alkynyl, or aryl (such as phenyl).

In addition, each alkyl and each aryl in R³ is optionally substituted with 1 to 7 fluoro atoms, where the term “alkyl” is intended to include divalent alkylene groups such as those present in —C₀₋₃alkylene-C₃₋₇cycloalkyl and —C₀₋₃alkylenearyl, for example. Each aryl in R³, for example in —C₀₋₃alkylenearyl or aryl, may be substituted with 1 to 3-OH, —C₁₋₆alkyl, —C₂₋₄alkenyl, —C₂₋₄alkynyl, —CN, halo, —O—C₁₋₆alkyl, —S—C₁₋₆alkyl, —S(O)—C₁₋₆alkyl, —S(O)₂—C₁₋₄alkyl, phenyl, —NO₂, —NH₂, —NH—C₁₋₆alkyl, or —N(C₁₋₆alkyl)₂ groups. Further, each of the aforementioned alkyl, alkenyl and alkynyl groups may be substituted with 1 to 5 fluoro atoms. It is understood that when referring to “each alkyl” and “each aryl” group in R³, the terms also include any alkyl and aryl groups that might be present in the R^(3a) and R^(3b) moieties.

In one embodiment, R³ is —C₁₋₁₀alkyl optionally substituted with 1 to 7 fluoro atoms such as —CF₃. In another embodiment, R³ is —C₂₋₇alkyl; and in yet another embodiment, R³ is —C₂₋₅alkyl, examples of which include, —CH₂CH₃, —(CH₂)₂CH₃, and —(CH₂)₃CH₃.

In another embodiment, R³ is —C₂₋₁₀alkenyl such as —CH₂CH═CHCH₃. In yet another embodiment, R³ is —C₃₋₁₀alkynyl such as —CH₂CCCH₃.

In another embodiment, R³ is —C₀₋₃alkylene-C₃₋₇cycloalkyl such as -cyclopropyl, —CH₂-cyclopropyl, cyclopentyl, —CH₂-cyclopentyl, —(CH₂)₂-cyclopentyl, and —CH₂-cyclohexyl. In a particular embodiment, R³ is —C₀₋₁alkylene-C₃₋₅cycloalkyl. In one embodiment, R³ is —C₂₋₃alkenylene-C₃₋₇cycloalkyl such as —CH₂CH═CH-cyclopentyl; and in another embodiment, R³ is —C₂₋₃alkynylene-C₃₋₇cycloalkyl such as —CH₂C≡C— cyclopentyl.

In yet another embodiment, R³ is —C₀₋₅alkylene-NR^(3a)—C₀₋₅alkylene-R^(3b). In one particular embodiment, R^(3a) is H and R^(3b) is —C₁₋₆alkyl. Examples of such R³ groups include —NHCH₂CH₃, —NHCH(CH₃)₂, —NH(CH₂)₂CH₃, —NH(CH₂)₃CH₃, —NHCH(CH₃)CH₂CH₃, —NH(CH₂)₄CH₃, and —NH(CH₂)₅CH₃.

In one embodiment, R³ is —C₀₋₅alkylene-O—C₀₋₅alkylene-R^(3b). In one particular embodiment, R^(3b) is selected from H, —C₁₋₆alkyl and aryl. Examples of such R³ groups include —OCH₃, —OCH₂CH₃, —OCH(CH₃)₂, —O(CH₂)₂CH₃, —O(CH₂)₃CH₃, —OCH₂CH(CH₃)₂, —O-phenyl, and —O-benzyl. In another embodiment, R³ is —C₀₋₅alkylene-O—C₀₋₅alkylene-R^(3b), where R^(3b) is —C₁₋₆alkyl, and in another embodiment, R³ is —O—C₁₋₅alkyl.

In another embodiment, R³ is —C₀₋₅alkylene-S—C₁₋₅alkylene-R^(3b), and in one particular embodiment R^(3b) is H, such as when R³ is —CH₂—S—CH₂CH₃. In another embodiment, R³ is —C₀₋₃alkylenearyl, such as phenyl, benzyl, and —(CH₂)₂-phenyl.

In one particular embodiment of interest, R³ is —C₁₋₁₀alkyl or —C₀₋₅alkylene-O—C₀₋₅alkylene-R^(3b), where R^(3b) is H; and in a specific embodiment, R³ is selected from —C₂₋₅alkyl and —C₁alkylene-O—C₁₋₅alkylene-H.

X is —C₁₋₁₂alkylene-, where at least one —CH₂— moiety in the alkylene is replaced with a —NR^(4a)—C(O)— or —C(O)—NR^(4a)— moiety. Thus X can be —C₁alkylene-, —C₁alkylene-, —C₂alkylene-, —C₃alkylene-, —C₄alkylene-, —C₅alkylene-, —C₆alkylene-, —C₇alkylene-, —C₈alkylene, —C₉alkylene-, —C₁₀alkylene-, —C₁₁alkylene-, and —C₁₂alkylene-, with at least one —CH₂— moiety being replaced. In one particular embodiment, X is —C₁₋₆alkylene-, more particularly —C₁₋₆alkylene-. R^(4a) is selected from H, —OH, and —C₁₋₄alkyl. In another embodiment, R^(4a) is H.

Each carbon atom in the —C₁₋₁₂alkylene- group may be substituted with one or more R^(4b) groups. R^(4b) is selected from —C₀₋₅ alkylene-COOR^(4c), —C₁₋₆alkyl, —C₀₋₁alkylene-CONH₂—C₁₋₂ alkylene-OH, —C₀₋₃ alkylene-C₃₋₇ cycloalkyl, 1H-indol-3-yl, benzyl, and hydroxybenzyl, where R^(4c) is H or —C₁₋₄alkyl. In one embodiment, the carbon atoms in —C₁₋₁₂alkylene- are unsubstituted with R^(4b) groups. In another embodiment, 1 or 2 carbon atoms are substituted with one or two R^(4b) groups. In another embodiment, one carbon atom is substituted with one R^(4b) group. In one particular embodiment, R^(4b) is —COOH, benzyl, or —C₁₋₆alkyl, including —C₁₋₃alkyl groups such as —CH₃ and —CH(CH₃)₂.

In addition, one —CH₂— moiety in X may be replaced with a group selected from —C₃₋₈cycloalkylene-, —CR^(4d)═CH—, and —CH═CR^(4d)—. R^(4d) is selected from —CH₂-thiophene and phenyl. In one embodiment, none of the —CH₂— moieties are so replaced. In another embodiment, one —CH₂— moiety is replaced with —C₃₋₈cycloalkylene-, for example, cyclohexylene. In another embodiment, one —CH₂— moiety is replaced with —CH═CR^(4d)—, where R^(4d) is —CH₂-thiophene such as —CH₂-thiophen-2-yl.

Each alkyl and each aryl in R^(4a), R^(4b), R^(4c), and R^(4d), may be substituted with 1 to 7 fluoro atoms, and the term “alkyl” is intended to include divalent alkylene groups such as that present in —C₀₋₅alkylene-COOR^(4c), for example. It is noted that the R^(4b) group, —C₀₋₃alkylene-C₃₋₇cycloalkyl, is intended to include a C₃₋₇cycloalkyl linked to the X—C₁₋₁₂alkylene- chain by a bond as well as a C₃₋₇cycloalkyl that is directly attached to the chain, as illustrated below:

In one embodiment, 1 to 4-CH₂— moieties are each replaced with —NHC(O)— or —C(O)NH—. In another embodiment, one —CH₂— moiety is replaced, examples of which include: —C(O)NH— and —CH₂—NHC(O)—. In one embodiment, X is —C₂₋₁₁alkylene- and 1, 2, or 3 —CH₂— moieties are replaced with a —NR^(4a)—C(O)— or —C(O)—NR^(4a)— moiety. In another embodiment, X is —C₂₋₅alkylene-, where 1 or 2-CH₂— moieties are replaced. When more than one —CH₂— moiety in C₁₋₁₂alkylene is replaced with a —NR^(4a)—C(O)— or —C(O)—NR^(4a)— moiety, the replaced moieties may be contiguous or non-contiguous. Exemplary X groups include the following, which depict, examples where one or more —CH₂— moieties are replaced with —NR^(4a)—C(O)— or —C(O)—NR^(4a)— moieties, examples where —CH₂— moieties are replaced with a group selected from —C₃₋₈cycloalkylene-, —CR^(4d)═CH—, and —CH═CR^(4d)—, as well as examples where carbon atoms in the —C₁₋₁₂alkylene- group are substituted with one or more R^(4b) groups:

C₁alkylene with one —CH₂— moiety replaced:

-   -   —C(O)NH—     -   —NHC(O)—     -   —C₂alkylene with one —CH₂— moiety replaced:     -   —CH₂—NHC(O)—     -   —C(O)NH—CH₂—     -   —CH₂—C(O)NH—     -   —CH[CH(CH₃)₂]—C(O)NH—

C₂alkylene with two —CH₂— moieties replaced:

-   -   —C(O)NH—NHC(O)—     -   —CH═C(—CH₂-2-thiophene)-C(O)NH—

C₃alkylene with one —CH₂— moiety replaced:

-   -   —(CH₂)₂—NHC(O)—     -   —CH(CH₃)—CH₂—NHC(O)—     -   —CH[CH(CH₃)₂]—CH₂—NHC(O)—     -   —CH(COOH)—CH₂—NHC(O)—     -   —CH₂—CH(COOH)—NHC(O)—

C₃alkylene with two —CH₂— moieties replaced:

-   -   —NHC(O)—CH₂—NHC(O)—

C₄alkylene with one —CH₂— moiety replaced:

-   -   —(CH₂)₃—NHC(O)—     -   —C(O)NH—CH₂—CH(COOH)—CH₂—

C₄alkylene with two —CH₂— moieties replaced:

-   -   —C(O)NH—CH(benzyl)-CH₂—NHC(O)—     -   —C(O)NH—CH(benzyl)-CH₂—C(O)NH—     -   —CH₂—NHC(O)—CH₂—NHC(O)—

C₄alkylene with three —CH₂— moieties replaced:

-   -   —CH₂—NHC(O)-cyclohexylene-NHC(O)—     -   —CH₂—N(OH)C(O)-cyclohexylene-NHC(O)—

C₅alkylene with two —CH₂— moieties replaced:

-   -   —CH₂—NHC(O)—CH₂—CH(COOH)—NHC(O)—     -   —CH₂—NHC(O)—(CH₂)₂—NHC(O)—     -   —C(O)NH—(CH₂)₂—C(O)N(OH)—CH₂     -   —C(O)NH—(CH₂)₂—CH(COOH)—NHC(O)—     -   —CH(COOH)—CH₂—NHC(O)—CH₂—NHC(O)—     -   —(CH₂)₂—NHC(O)-cyclohexylene-NHC(O)—

C₆alkylene with two —CH₂— moieties replaced:

-   -   —C(O)NH—(CH₂)₄—NHC(O)—     -   —CH₂—NHC(O)—(CH₂)₂—CH(COOH)—NHC(O)—     -   —C(O)NH—(CH₂)₃—CH(COOH)—NHC(O)—

C₆alkylene with three —CH₂— moieties replaced:

-   -   —C(O)NH—(CH₂)₂—NHC(O)—CH₂—NHC(O)—

C₆alkylene with four —CH₂— moieties replaced:

-   -   —C(O)NH—(CH₂)₂—NHC(O)-cyclohexylene-NHC(O)—

C₇alkylene with two —CH₂— moieties replaced:

-   -   —CH₂—NHC(O)—(CH₂)₄—NHC(O)—     -   —C(O)NH—(CH₂)₄—CH(COOH)—NHC(O)—

C₇alkylene with three —CH₂— moieties replaced:

-   -   —CH₂—NHC(O)—(CH₂)₂—NHC(O)—CH₂—NHC(O)—     -   —CH[CH(CH₃)₂]—C(O)NH—(CH₂)₂—NHC(O)—CH₂—NHC(O)—

C₇alkylene with four —CH₂— moieties replaced:

-   -   —CH₂—NHC(O)—(CH₂)₂—NHC(O)-cyclohexylene-NHC(O)—     -   —CH₂—C(O)NH—(CH₂)₂—NHC(O)-cyclohexylene-NHC(O)—

C₈alkylene with three —CH₂— moieties replaced:

-   -   —CH₂—NHC(O)—(CH₂)₂—NHC(O)—CH₂—CH(COOH)—NHC(O)—     -   —C(O)NH—(CH₂)₄—NHC(O)—CH₂—NHC(O)—

C₈alkylene with four —CH₂— moieties replaced:

-   -   —C(O)NH—(CH₂)₄—NHC(O)-cyclohexylene-NHC(O)—

C₉alkylene with two —CH₂— moieties replaced:

-   -   —CH₂—NHC(O)—(CH₂)₆—NHC(O)—

C₉alkylene with four —CH₂— moieties replaced:

-   -   —CH₂—NHC(O)—(CH₂)₄—NHC(O)-cyclohexylene-NHC(O)—

C₁₀alkylene with four —CH₂— moieties replaced:

-   -   —C(O)NH—(CH₂)₆—NHC(O)-cyclohexylene-NHC(O)—     -   C₁₁alkylene with three —CH₂— moieties replaced:     -   —CH(CH(CH₃)₂)—C(O)NH—(CH₂)₆—NHC(O)—CH₂—NHC(O)—

C₁₁alkylene with four —CH₂— moieties replaced:

-   -   —CH₂—NHC(O)—(CH₂)₆—NHC(O)-cyclohexylene-NHC(O)—         In one embodiment, X is: —C(O)NH—; —CH₂—NHC(O)—;         —(CH₂)₂—NHC(O)—; —CH₂—NHC(O)-cyclohexylene-NHC(O)—;         —CH₂—NHC(O)—CH₂—NHC(O)—; —CH₂—NHC(O)—CH₂—CH(COOH)—NHC(O)—;         —CH₂—NHC(O)—(CH₂)₂—NHC(O)—;         —CH₂—NHC(O)—(CH₂)₂—NHC(O)—CH₂—NHC(O)—;         —CH₂—NHC(O)—(CH₂)₂—NHC(O)-cyclohexylene-NHC(O)—; or         —CH₂—NHC(O)—(CH₂)₂—NHC(O)—CH₂—CH(COOH)—NHC(O)—. In another         particular embodiment, X is —C(O)NH— or —CH₂—NHC(O)—.

R⁵ is selected from —C₀₋₃alkylene-SR^(5a), —C₀₋₃alkylene-C(O)NR^(5b)R^(5c), —C₀₋₃alkylene-NR^(5b)—C(O)R^(5d), —NH—C₀₋₁alkylene-P(O)(OR^(5e))₂, —C₀₋₃alkylene-P(O)OR^(5e)R^(5f), —C₀₋₂alkylene-CHR^(5g)—COOH, —C₀₋₃alkylene-C(O)NR^(5h)—CHR^(5i)—COOH, and —C₀₋₃alkylene-S—SR^(5j). Each alkyl and each aryl in R⁵ is optionally substituted with 1 to 7 fluoro atoms, where the term “alkyl” is intended to include divalent alkylene groups such as those present in —C₀₋₃alkylene-SR^(5a) and —C₀₋₃alkylene-P(O)OR^(5e)R^(5f), for example. Each aryl and heteroaryl in R⁵ may be substituted with 1 to 3-OH, —C₁₋₆alkyl, —C₂₋₄alkenyl, —C₂₋₄alkynyl, —CN, halo, —O—C₁₋₆alkyl, —S(O)—C₁₋₆alkyl, —S(O)₂—C₁₋₄alkyl, phenyl, —NO₂, —NH₂, —NH—C₁₋₆alkyl, or —N(C₁₋₆alkyl)₂ groups. Further, each of the aforementioned alkyl, alkenyl and alkynyl groups may be substituted with 1 to 5 fluoro atoms. It is understood that when referring to “each alkyl,” “each aryl” and “each heteroaryl” group in R⁵, the terms also include any alkyl, aryl and heteroaryl groups that might be present in the R^(5a-5j), R^(5aa), R^(5ab), R^(5ba), R^(5bb), R^(5bc), R^(5ca), R^(5da), R^(5db), R^(5ea), R^(5eb), R^(5ec), and R^(5fb) moieties.

In one embodiment, R⁵ is —C₀₋₃alkylene-SR^(5a). R^(5a) is H or —C(O)—R^(5a). The R^(5a) group is —C₁₋₆alkyl, —C₀₋₆alkylene-C₃₋₇cycloalkyl, —C₀₋₆alkylenearyl, —C₀₋₆alkyleneheteroaryl, —C₀₋₆alkylenemorpholine, —C₀₋₆alkylenepiperazine-CH₃, —CH[N(R^(5ab))₂]-aa where aa is an amino acid side chain, -2-pyrrolidine, —C₀₋₆alkylene-OR^(5ab), —O—C₀₋₆alkylenearyl, —C₁₋₂alkylene-OC(O)—C₁₋₆alkyl, —C₁₋₂alkylene-OC(O)—C₀₋₆alkylenearyl, or —O—C₁₋₂alkylene-OC(O)O—C₁₋₆alkyl. The R^(5ab) group is H or —C₁₋₆alkyl. In one specific embodiment, R^(5a) is H, for example, R⁵ can be —SH or —CH₂SH. In another embodiment, R^(5a) is —C(O)—R^(5aa), where R^(5aa) is —C₁₋₆alkyl. Exemplary —C₁₋₆alkyl groups include —CH₃, —CH₂CH₃, —CH(CH₃)₂, —C(CH₃)₃, and —CH₂CH(CH₃)₂. Thus, examples of R⁵ include —SC(O)CH₃, —CH₂SC(O)CH₃, —CH₂SC(O)CH₂CH₃, —CH₂SC(O)CH(CH₃)₂ and —CH₂SC(O)C(CH₃)₃, and —CH₂SC(O)CH₂—CH(CH₃)₂. In one embodiment, R^(5a) is selected from H and —C(O)—C₁₋₆alkyl.

In one embodiment, R⁵ is —C₀₋₃alkylene-SR^(5a), where R^(5a) is —C(O)—R^(5aa) and R^(5aa) is —C₀₋₆alkylene —C₃₋₇cycloalkyl. Exemplary C₃₋₇cycloalkyl groups include cyclopentyl and cyclohexyl. Thus, examples of R⁵ include —CH₂SC(O)-cyclopentyl, —CH₂SC(O)-cyclohexyl, and —CH₂SC(O)—CH₂-cyclopentyl. In another embodiment, R⁵ is —C₀₋₃alkylene-SR^(5a), where R^(5a) is —C(O)—R^(5aa) and R^(5aa) is —C₀₋₆alkylenearyl. In one specific embodiment, the aryl is optionally substituted with 1 to 3 substituents such as —O—C₁₋₆alkyl. Exemplary aryl groups include phenyl and -phenyl-OCH₃. Thus, examples of R⁵ include —CH₂SC(O)-phenyl and —CH₂SC(O)-phenyl-OCH₃.

In yet another embodiment, R⁵ is —C₀₋₃alkylene-SR^(5a), where R^(5a) is —C(O)—R^(5aa) and R^(5aa) is —C₀₋₆alkyleneheteroaryl. Exemplary heteroaryl groups include furanyl, thienyl and pyridinyl. Thus, examples of R⁵ include —CH₂SC(O)-2-pyridine, —CH₂SC(O)-3-pyridine, and —CH₂SC(O)-4-pyridine. In another embodiment, R^(5a) is —C(O)—R^(5aa), where R^(5aa) is —C₀₋₆alkylenemorpholine:

more particularly, —C₁₋₃alkylenemorpholine. Thus, examples of R⁵ include —CH₂S—C(O)CH₂-morpholine and —CH₂S—C(O)(CH₂)₂-morpholine. In another embodiment, R⁵ is —C₀₋₃alkylene-SR^(5a), where R^(5a) is —C(O)—R^(5aa) and R^(5aa) is —C₀₋₆alkylenepiperazine-CH₃. Thus, examples of R⁵ include —CH₂S—C(O)(CH₂)₂-piperazine-CH₃.

In one embodiment, R⁵ is —C₀₋₃alkylene-SR^(5a), where R^(5a) is —C(O)—R^(5aa) and R^(5aa) is —CH[N(R^(5ab))₂]-aa where aa is an amino acid side chain. For example, the amino acid side chain could be —CH(CH₃)₂, the valine side chain, —CH₂CH(CH₃)₂ (leucine side chain), —CH(CH₃)CH₂CH₃ (isolcucinc side chain), —CH₂COOH (aspartic acid side chain), —(CH₂)₂COOH (glutamic acid side chain), —CH(OH)(CH₃) (threonine side chain), -benzyl (phenylalanine side chain), -4-hydroxybenzyl (tyrosine side chain), and —(CH₂)₂SCH₃ (methionine side chain). Thus, examples of R⁵ include —CH₂S—C(O)CH(NH₂)—CH(CH₃)₂, —CH₂SC(O)CH(NH₂)—CH₂CH(CH₃)₂, —CH₂SC(O)CH(NH₂)—CH(CH₃)CH₂CH₃, —CH₂SC(O)CH(NH₂)—CH₂COOH, —CH₂SC(O)CH(NH₂)—(CH₂)₂COOH, —CH₂SC(O)CH(NH₂)—CH(OH)(CH₃), —CH₂SC(O)—CH(NH₂)-benzyl, —CH₂SC(O)CH(NH₂)-4-hydroxybenzyl, and —CH₂SC(O)CH(NH₂)—(CH₂)₂SCH₃.

In yet another embodiment, R⁵ is —C₀₋₃alkylene-SR^(5a), where R^(5a) is —C(O)—R^(5aa) and R^(5aa) is -2-pyrrolidine:

Thus, an example of R⁵ is —CH₂S—C(O)-2-pyrrolidine.

In another embodiment, R⁵ is —C₀₋₃alkylene-SR^(5a), where R^(5a) is —C(O)—R^(5aa) and R^(5aa) is —C₀₋₆alkylene-OR^(5ab). In one embodiment, R^(5ab) is H, such that R^(5a) is —C(O)—C₀₋₆alkylene-OH. In another embodiment, R^(5ab) is —C₁₋₆alkyl, such that R^(5a) is —C(O)—C₀₋₆alkylene-O—C₁₋₆alkyl, for example, R⁵ can be —CH₂SC(O)—O—CH₂CH₃.

In another embodiment, R⁵ is —C₀₋₃alkylene-SR^(5a), where R^(5a) is —C(O)—R^(5aa) and R^(5aa) is —O—C₀₋₆alkylenearyl. In yet another embodiment, R⁵ is —C₀₋₃alkylene-SR^(5a), where R^(5a) is —C(O)—R^(5aa) and R^(5aa) is —C₁₋₂alkylene-OC(O)—C₁₋₆alkyl; and in another embodiment, R⁵ is —C₀₋₃alkylene-SR^(5a), where R^(5a) is —C(O)—R^(5aa) and R^(5aa) is —C₁₋₂alkylene-OC(O)—C₀₋₆alkylenearyl. In yet another embodiment, R⁵ is —C₀₋₃alkylene-SR^(5a), where R^(5a) is —C(O)—R^(5aa) and R^(5aa) is —O—C₁₋₂alkylene-OC(O)O—C₁₋₆alkyl, for example, R⁵ can be —CH₂SC(O)OCH(CH₃)—OC(O)O—CH(CH₃)₂.

In one embodiment, R⁵ is —C₀₋₃alkylene-C(O)NR^(5b)R^(5c). The R^(5b) moiety is H, —OH, —OC(O)R^(5ba), —CH₂COOH, —O-benzyl, pyridyl, or —OC(S)NR^(5bb)R^(5bc). R^(5ba) is H, —C₁₋₆alkyl, aryl, —OCH₂-aryl (for example, —OCH₂-phenyl), —CH₂O-aryl (for example, —CH₂O-phenyl), or —NR^(5bb)R^(5bc). The R^(5bb) and R^(5bc) moieties are independently H or —C₁₋₄alkyl. In one embodiment, R^(5b) is —OH, —O-benzyl, or —OC(O)R^(5ba) where —R^(5ba) is —C₁₋₆alkyl. R^(5c) is H, —C₁₋₆alkyl, or —C(O)—R^(5ca), where R^(5ca) is H, —C₁₋₆alkyl, —C₃₋₇cycloalkyl, aryl, or heteroaryl. In one particular embodiment, R⁵ is —C₀₋₃alkylene-C(O)NR^(5b)R^(5c) and R^(5c) is H. In another embodiment, R⁵ is —C₀₋₃alkylene-C(O)NR^(5b)R^(5c), where R^(5b) is —OH or —O-benzyl, and R^(5c) is H, for example, R⁵ can be —C(O)NH(OH), —CH₂C(O)NH(OH), —C(O)NH(—O-benzyl), or —CH₂C(O)NH(—O-benzyl). In another embodiment, R⁵ is —C₀₋₃alkylene-C(O)NR^(5b)R^(5c), where R^(5b) is —OC(O)R^(5ba), where —R^(5ba) is —C₁₋₆alkyl, and R^(5c) is H, for example, R⁵ can be —C(O)N[OC(O)CH₃]H or —C(O)N[OC(O)C(CH₃)₃]H. In still another embodiment, R⁵ is —C₀₋₃alkylene-C(O)NR^(5b)R^(5c) and both R^(5b) and R^(5c) are H, for example, R⁵ can be —C(O)NH₂.

In another embodiment, R⁵ is —C₀₋₃alkylene-C(O)NR^(5b)R^(5c), where R^(5b) is —CH₂COOH and R^(5c) is H, for example, R⁵ can be —C(O)N(CH₂COOH)H. In yet another embodiment, R⁵ is —C₀₋₃alkylene-C(O)NR^(5b)R^(5c), where R^(5b) is —OC(O)R^(5ba), where —R^(5ba) is —O—CH₂-aryl or —CH₂—O-aryl and R^(5c) is H. Thus, examples of R⁵ include —CH₂—C(O)NH[OC(O)OCH₂-phenyl] and —CH₂—C(O)N[OC(O)—CH₂O-phenyl]H. In another embodiment, R⁵ is —C₀₋₃alkylene-C(O)NR^(5b)R^(5c), where R^(5b) is —OC(S)NR^(5bb)R^(5bc), where R^(5bb) and R^(5bc) are both —C₁₋₄alkyl, and R^(5c) is H. For example, R⁵ can be —CH₂—C(O)N[OC(S)N(CH₃)₂]H.

In one embodiment, R⁵ is —C₀₋₃alkylene-NR^(5b)—C(O)R^(5d). R^(5d) is H, —C₀₋₃alkylenearyl, —NR^(5da)R^(5db), —CH₂SH, or —O—C₁₋₆alkyl. The R^(5da) and R^(5db) moieties are independently H or —C₁₋₄alkyl. In another embodiment, R⁵ is —C₀₋₃alkylene-NR^(5b)—C(O)R^(5d), where R^(5b) is —OH and R^(5d) is H, for example, R⁵ can be —CH₂—N(OH)C(O)H; and in another embodiment, R^(5b) is —OH and R^(5d) is —C₁₋₄alkyl, for example, R⁵ can be —CH₂—N(OH)C(O)CH₃. In another embodiment, R⁵ is —C₀₋₃alkylene-NR^(5b)—C(O)R^(5d), where R^(5b) is H and R^(5d) is —CH₂SH, for example, R⁵ can be —NHC(O)CH₂SH or —CH₂NHC(O)—CH₂SH.

In yet another embodiment, R⁵ is —NH—C₀₋₁alkylene-P(O)(OR^(5e))₂. The R^(5e) moiety is H, —C₁₋₆alkyl, —C₁₋₃alkylenearyl, —C₁₋₃alkyleneheteroaryl, —C₃₋₇cycloalkyl, —CH(CH₃)—O—C(O)R^(5ea),

The R^(5ea) group is —O—C₁₋₆alkyl, —O—C₃₋₇cycloalkyl, —NR^(5eb)R^(5ec), or —CH(NH₂)CH₂COOCH₃. R^(5eb) and R^(5ec) are independently H, —C₁₋₄alkyl, or —C₁₋₃alkylenearyl (for example, benzyl). R^(5eb) and R^(5ec) may also be taken together to form —(CH₂)₃₋₆—. In one embodiment, R⁵ is —NH—C₀₋₁alkylene-P(O)(OR^(5e))₂, where R^(5e) is H, for example, R⁵ can be —NH—CH₂—P(O)(OH)₂.

In one embodiment, R⁵ is —C₀₋₃alkylene-P(O)OR^(5e)R^(5f). The R^(5f) moiety is H, —C₁₋₄alkyl, —C₀₋₃alkylenearyl, —C₁₋₃alkylene-NR^(5fa)R^(5fb), or —C₁₋₃alkylene(aryl)-C₀₋₃alkylene-NR^(5fa)R^(5fb). The R^(5fa) and R^(5fb) groups are independently H or —C₁₋₄alkyl. In one embodiment, R^(5e) is H, for example, R⁵ can be —C₀₋₃alkylene-P(O)(OH)R^(5f).

In one embodiment, R⁵ is —C₀₋₂alkylene-CHR^(5g)—COOH. The R^(5g) moiety is H, —OH, —C₁₋₆alkyl, —C₁₋₃alkylenearyl, or —CH₂—O—(CH₂)₂—OCH₃. In one embodiment, R^(5g) is —CH₂—O—(CH₂)₂—OCH₃, for example, R⁵ can be —CH₂—C[CH₂—O—(CH₂)₂—OCH₃]—COOH. In another embodiment, R^(5g) is H, for example, R⁵ can be —CH₂COOH. In yet another embodiment, R^(5g) is —OH, for example, R⁵ can be —CH(OH)COOH.

In one embodiment, R⁵ is —C₀₋₃alkylene-C(O)NR^(5h)—CHR^(5i)—COOH. The R^(5h) moiety is H or —C₁₋₄alkyl. The R^(5i) moiety is H, —C₁₋₄alkyl, or —C₀₋₃alkylenearyl. In one embodiment, R^(5h) is H and R^(5i) is —C₀₋₃alkylenearyl, and the aryl is optionally substituted with 1 to 3 substituents such as —OH, for example, R⁵ can be —C(O)NH—CH(CH₂-phenyl-OH)(COOH).

In another embodiment, R⁵ is —C₀₋₃alkylene-S—SR^(5j), and R^(5j) is —C₁₋₆alkyl, aryl, or —CH₂CH(NH₂)COOH. Examples of such R⁵ groups include —C₀₋₃alkylene-S—S—CH₃, —C₀₋₃alkylene-S—S-phenyl, and —C₀₋₃alkylene-S—S—CH₂CH(NH₂)—COOH.

R⁶ is selected from —C₁₋₆alkyl, —CH₂O(CH₂)₂OCH₃, —C₁₋₆alkylene-O—C₁₋₆alkyl, —C₀₋₃alkylenearyl, —C₀₋₃alkyleneheteroaryl, and —C₀₋₃alkylene-C₃₋₇cycloalkyl. In one particular embodiment, R⁶ is selected from —C₁₋₆alkyl, —C₀₋₃alkylenearyl, and —C₀₋₃alkylene-C₃₋₇cycloalkyl. Each alkyl and each aryl in R⁶ is optionally substituted with 1 to 7 fluoro atoms, where the term “alkyl” is intended to include divalent alkylene groups such as those present in —C₁₋₆alkylene-O—C₁₋₆alkyl and —C₀₋₃alkylene-C₃₋₇cycloalkyl, for example. In addition, each aryl and heteroaryl in R⁶ may be substituted with 1 to 3 —OH, —C₁₋₆ alkyl, —C₂₋₄alkenyl, —C₂₋₄alkynyl, —CN, halo, —O—C₁₋₆alkyl, —S—C₁₋₆alkyl, —S(O)—C₁₋₆ alkyl, —S(O)₂—C₁₋₄ alkyl, phenyl, —NO₂, —NH₂—NH—C₁₋₆ alkyl, or —N(C₁₋₆ alkyl)₂ groups. Further, each of the aforementioned alkyl, alkenyl and alkynyl groups may be substituted with 1 to 5 fluoro atoms.

In one embodiment, R⁶ is —C₁₋₆alkyl, for example, —CH₃, —CH₂CH₃, —CH(CH₃)₂, —(CH₂)₂CH₃—(CH₂)₃CH₃—CH(CH₃)CH₂CH₃, —CH₂CH(CH₃)₂, —CH₂C(CH₃)₃, —(CH₂)₂CH(CH₃)₂, or —(CH₂)₄CH₃. As noted above, each alkyl in R⁶ is optionally substituted with 1 to 7 fluoro atoms. Examples of such fluoro-substituted R⁶ groups include —(CH₂)₂CF₃ and —(CH₂)₃CF₃. In another embodiment, R⁶ is —C₃₋₅alkyl.

In another embodiment, R⁶ is —CH₂O(CH₂)₂OCH₃. In still another one embodiment, R⁶ is —C₁₋₆alkylene-O—C₁₋₆alkyl, for example, —OCH₃ and —CH₂OCH₃.

In one embodiment, R⁶ is —C₀₋₃alkylenearyl, for example, phenyl, benzyl, —CH₂-biphenyl, —(CH₂)₂-phenyl and —CH₂-naphthalen-1-yl. The aryl may be substituted with 1 to 3 substituents. Thus, other examples of R⁶ include mono-substituted groups such as, methylbenzyl, chlorobenzyl, fluorobenzyl, fluorophenyl, bromobenzyl, iodobenzyl, -benzyl-CF₃, 2-trifluoromethyl-benzyl, -benzyl-CN, and -benzyl-NO₂; and di-substituted groups such as di-chlorobenzyl and di-fluorobenzyl. Each aryl may also be substituted with 1 to 7 fluoro atoms. Thus, other examples of R⁶ include penta-fluorobenzyl. In another embodiment, R⁶ is —C₀₋₁alkylenearyl.

In one embodiment, R⁶ is —C₀₋₃alkyleneheteroaryl, for example, —CH₂-pyridyl, —CH₂-furanyl, —CH₂-thienyl, and —CH₂-thiophenyl. In one particular embodiment, R⁶ is —C₀₋₁alkyleneheteroaryl. In another embodiment, R⁶ is —C₀₋₃alkylene-C₃₋₇cycloalkyl, for example, —CH₂-cyclopropyl, cyclopentyl, —CH₂-cyclopentyl, -cyclohexyl, and —CH₂-cyclohexyl. In one particular embodiment, R⁶ is —C₀₋₁alkylene-C₃₋₇cycloalkyl.

R⁷ is H or is taken together with R⁶ to form —C₃₋₈cycloalkyl. In one embodiment, R⁷ is H. In another embodiment, R⁷ is taken together with R⁶ to form —C₃₋₈cycloalkyl, for example cyclopentyl.

One particular embodiment of the invention provides for an active compound of formula I where Ar**—COOH represents Ar—R¹ and R⁵ is —C₀₋₃alkylene-SH. One corresponding prodrug (prodrug A) can contain a thioester linkage, which can be cleaved in vivo to form the —COOH(R¹) and —C₀₋₃alkylene-SH(R⁵) moieties. Another corresponding prodrug (prodrug B, where Z is —C₁₋₆alkylene, optionally substituted with one or more moieties such as hydroxyl, phenyl, carboxyl, and so forth), contains both an ester and a thioester group, which can be similarly cleaved in vivo, but which also releases a physiologically acceptable acid such as α-hydroxy acid (Z is —CH₂—), β-hydroxy acid (Z is —(CH₂)₂—), (R)-2-hydroxypropionic or lactic acid (Z is —CH(CH₃)—), (R)-hydroxyphenyl acetic or mandelic acid (Z is —CH(phenyl)-), salicylic acid (Z is -phenylene-), 2,3-dihydroxysuccinic or tartaric acid (Z is —CH[CH(OH)(COOH)]—), citric acid (Z is —C[CH₂COOH]₂—), hydroxy bis- and hydroxy-tris acids, and so forth.

Yet another corresponding prodrug (prodrug C) is a dimer form of prodrug A, thus containing two thioester linkages, which can both be cleaved in vivo to form two active moieties, each containing the —COOH(R¹) and —C₀₋₃alkylene-SH(R⁵) moieties.

Another embodiment of the invention provides for an active compound of formula I where R⁵ is —C₀₋₃alkylene-SH, and the prodrug (prodrug D) is a dimer form of the compound:

In one embodiment of the invention, the compounds have formula I, where Z is an imidazole or triazole selected from:

r is 1; Ar is selected from:

R¹ is —COOR^(1a), tetrazol-5-yl, or —SO₂NHR^(1d); R^(1a) is H or —C₁₋₆alkyl; R^(1d) is —C(O)R^(1c), where R^(1c) is —C₁₋₆alkyl; R² is H, halo, or —COOH; R³ is —C₁₋₁₀alkyl or —C₀₋₅alkylene-O—C₀₋₅alkylene-R^(3b), where R^(3b) is H; X is —C₁₋₈alkylene-, where at least one —CH₂— moiety in the alkylene is replaced with —NHC(O)— or —C(O)NH; R⁵ is —C₀₋₃alkylene-SR^(5a), —C₀₋₃alkylene-C(O)NHR^(5b), or —C₀₋₂alkylene-CHR^(5g)—COOH; R^(5a) is H or —C(O)C₁₋₆alkyl; R^(5b) is —OH, —O-benzyl, or —OC(O)—C₁₋₆alkyl; R^(5g) is H, —OH, —C₁₋₃alkylenearyl, or —CH₂—O—(CH₂)₂—O—CH₃; R⁶ is —C₁₋₆alkyl, —C₀₋₃alkylenearyl, —C₀₋₃alkyleneheteroaryl, or —C₀₋₃alkylene-C₃₋₇cycloalkyl; R⁷ is H or is taken together with R⁶ to form —C₃₋₈cycloalkyl; each ring in Ar and each aryl in R⁶ is optionally substituted with an —C₁₋₆alkyl or halo group, and the alkyl is optionally substituted with 1 to 5 fluoro atoms; one carbon atom in X is optionally substituted with a —C₀₋₅alkylene-COOH group; one —CH₂— moiety in X may be replaced with —C₃₋₈cycloalkylene-; and each alkyl and each aryl in R¹, R³, and R⁵⁻⁶ is optionally substituted with 1 to 7 fluoro atoms; or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof.

In one embodiment of the invention, the compound of formula I is the species embodied in formula IIa:

where Ar, R²⁻³, X, and R⁵⁻⁷ are as defined for formula I; or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof. In one particular embodiment, Ar is selected from:

R¹ is —COOR^(1a) or tetrazol-5-yl, where R^(1a) is H or —C₁₋₆alkyl; R² is H, halo, or —COOH; R³ is —C₁₋₁₀alkyl or —C₀₋₅alkylene-O—C₀₋₅alkylene-R^(3b), where R^(3b) is H; X is —C₁₋₈alkylene-, where at least one —CH₂— moiety in the alkylene is replaced with —NHC(O)— or —C(O)NH—; R⁵ is —C₀₋₃alkylene-SR^(5a), —C₀₋₃alkylene-C(O)NHR^(5b), or —C₀₋₂alkylene-CHR^(5g)—COOH; R^(5a) is H or —C(O)C₁₋₆alkyl; R^(5b) is —OH, —O-benzyl, or —OC(O)—C₁₋₆alkyl; R^(5g) is H, —OH, or —CH₂—O—(CH₂)₂—O—CH₃; R⁶ is —C₁₋₆alkyl, —C₀₋₃alkylenearyl, —C₀₋₃alkyleneheteroaryl, or —C₀₋₃alkylene-C₃₋₇cycloalkyl; R⁷ is H or is taken together with R⁶ to form —C₃₋₈cycloalkyl; each ring in Ar and each aryl in R⁶ is optionally substituted with an —C₁₋₆alkyl or halo group, and the alkyl is optionally substituted with 1 to 5 fluoro atoms; one carbon atom in X is optionally substituted with a —C₀₋₅alkylene-COOH group; one —CH₂— moiety in X may be replaced with —C₃₋₈cycloalkylene-; and each alkyl and each aryl in R¹, R³, and R⁵⁻⁶ is optionally substituted with 1 to 7 fluoro atoms; or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof.

In another embodiment of the invention, the compound of formula 1 is the species embodied in formula IIb:

where R¹⁻³, X, and R⁵⁻⁷ are as defined for formula I; or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof. In one particular embodiment compounds of the invention have formula IIb and: R¹ is —COOR^(1a) or tetrazol-5-yl, where R^(1a) is H or —C₁₋₆alkyl; R² is H or halo; R³ is —C₁₋₁₀alkyl; X is —C₁₋₆alkylene-, where at least one —CH₂— moiety in the alkylene is replaced with —NHC(O)— or —C(O)NH—; R⁵ is —C₀₋₃alkylene-SR^(5a), —C₀₋₃alkylene-C(O)NHR^(5b), or —C₀₋₂alkylene-CH₂—COOH, R^(5a) is H or —C(O)C₁₋₆alkyl, and R^(5b) is —OH, —O-benzyl, or —OC(O)—C₁₋₆alkyl; R⁶ is —C₁₋₆alkyl or —C₀₋₃alkylenearyl; R⁷ is H; and each ring in Ar and each aryl in R⁶ is optionally substituted with an —C₁₋₆alkyl or halo group; each alkyl and each aryl in R¹, R³, and R⁵⁻⁶ is optionally substituted with 1 to 7 fluoro atoms; or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof.

In yet another embodiment of the invention, the compound of formula I is the species embodied in formula IIc:

where R¹⁻³, X, and R⁵⁻⁷ are as defined for formula I; or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof. In one particular embodiment compounds of the invention have formula IIc and: R¹ is —COOR^(1a) or tetrazol-5-yl, where R^(1a) is H or —C₁₋₆alkyl; R² is H, halo, or —COOH; R³ is —C₁₋₁₀alkyl or —C₀₋₅alkylene-O—C₀₋₅alkylene-R^(3b), where R^(3b) is H; X is —C₁₋₈alkylene-, where at least one —CH₂— moiety in the alkylene is replaced with —NHC(O)— or —C(O)NH—; R⁵ is —C₀₋₃alkylene-SR^(5a), —C₀₋₃alkylene-C(O)NHR^(5b), or —C₀₋₂alkylene-CHR^(5g)—COOH; R^(5a) is H or —C(O)C₁₋₆alkyl; R^(5b) is —OH or —O-benzyl; R^(5g) is H, —OH, or —CH₂—O—(CH₂)₂—O—CH₃; R⁶ is —C₁₋₆alkyl, —C₀₋₃alkylenearyl, —C₀₋₃alkyleneheteroaryl, or —C₀₋₃alkylene-C₃₋₇cycloalkyl; R⁷ is H or is taken together with R⁶ to form —C₃₋₈cycloalkyl; each ring in Ar and each aryl in R⁶ is optionally substituted a —C₁₋₆alkyl or halo group, and the alkyl is optionally substituted with 1 to 5 fluoro atoms; one carbon atom in X is optionally substituted with a —C₀₋₅alkylene-COOH group; and one —CH₂— moiety in X may be replaced with —C₃₋₈cycloalkylene-; each alkyl and each aryl in R¹, R³, and R⁵⁻⁶ is optionally substituted with 1 to 7 fluoro atoms; or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof.

In one embodiment of the invention, the compound of formula 1 is the species embodied in formula IId:

where R¹⁻³, X, and R⁵⁻⁷ are as defined for formula I; or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof. In one particular embodiment compounds of the invention have formula IId and: R¹ is —COOR^(1a), and R^(1a) is H or —C₁₋₆alkyl; R² is H; R³ is —C₁₋₁₀alkyl; X is —C₁₋₆alkylene-, where at least one —CH₂— moiety in the alkylene is replaced with —NHC(O)— or —C(O)NH—; R⁵ is —C₀₋₃alkylene-SR^(5a), —C₀₋₃alkylene-C(O)NHR^(5b), or —C₀₋₂alkylene-CH₂—COOH, R^(5a) is H or —C(O)C₁₋₆alkyl, and R^(5b) is —OH or —O-benzyl; R⁶ is —C₁₋₆alkyl or —C₀₋₃alkylenearyl; R⁷ is H; each alkyl and each aryl in R¹, R³, and R⁵⁻⁶ is optionally substituted with 1 to 7 fluoro atoms; or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof.

In another embodiment of the invention, the compound of formula 1 is the species embodied in formula IIIa:

where Ar, R³, X, and R⁵⁻⁷ are as defined for formula I; or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof. In another embodiment of the invention, the compound of formula I is the species embodied in formula IIIb:

where R¹, R³, X, and R⁵⁻⁷ are as defined for formula I; or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof. In another particular embodiment, compounds of the invention have formula IIIb and: R¹ is —COOR^(1a), tetrazol-5-yl, or —SO₂NHR^(1d); R^(1a) is H or C₁₋₆alkyl; R^(1d) is —C(O)R^(1c), where R^(1c) is —C₁₋₆alkyl; R³ is —C₁₋₁₀alkyl; X is —C₁₋₆alkylene-, where at least one —CH₂— moiety in the alkylene is replaced with —NHC(O)— or —C(O)NH—; R⁵ is —C₀₋₃alkylene-SR^(5a), —C₀₋₃alkylene-C(O)NHR^(5b), or —C₀₋₂alkylene-CHR^(5g)—COOH; R^(5a) is H or —C(O)C₁₋₆alkyl; R^(5b) is —OH or —O-benzyl; R^(5g) is —OH, —C₁₋₃alkylenearyl, or —CH₂—O—(CH₂)₂—O—CH₃; R⁶ is —C₁₋₆alkyl or —C₀₋₃alkylenearyl; R⁷ is H or is taken together with R⁶ to form —C₃₋₈cycloalkyl; and each alkyl and each aryl in R¹, R³, and R⁵⁻⁶ is optionally substituted with 1 to 7 fluoro atoms; or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof.

In one embodiment of the invention, the compound of formula I is the species embodied in formula IVa:

where Ar, R³, X, and R⁵⁻⁷ are as defined for formula I; or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof. In another embodiment of the invention, the compound of formula I is the species embodied in formula IVa:

where R¹, R³, X, and R⁵⁻⁷ are as defined for formula I; or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof. In another particular embodiment, compounds of the invention have formula IVb and: R¹ is tetrazol-5-yl; R³ is —C₁₋₁₀alkyl; X is —C₁₋₈alkylene-, where at least one —CH₂-moiety in the alkylene is replaced with —NHC(O)— or —C(O)NH—; R⁵ is —C₀₋₃alkylene-SR^(5a) or —C₀₋₂alkylene-CHR^(5g)—COOH; R^(5a) is H or —C(O)C₁₋₆alkyl; R^(5g) is —OH; R⁶ is —C₀₋₃alkylenearyl; R⁷ is H; and each alkyl and each aryl in R¹, R³, and R⁵⁻⁶ is optionally substituted with 1 to 7 fluoro atoms; or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof.

In another particular embodiment, R¹ is selected from —COOH, —NHSO₂R^(1b), —SO₂NHR^(1d), —SO₂OH, —C(O)NH—SO₂R^(1c), —P(O)(OH)₂, —CN, —O—CH(R^(1e))—COOH, tetrazol-5-yl,

where R^(1b), R^(1c), R^(1d), and R^(1e), are as defined for formula I. In one particular embodiment, R¹ is selected from —COOR^(1a), —SO₂NHR^(1d), and tetrazol-5-yl. In another embodiment, R¹ is selected from —COOH, —SO₂NHC(O)—C₁₋₆alkyl, and tetrazol-5-yl. In another aspect, these embodiments have formula II, IIa, IIb, IIc, IId, III, IIIa, or IIIb.

In one particular embodiment, R¹ is —COOR^(1a), where R^(1a) is —C₁₋₆alkyl, —C₁₋₃alkylenearyl, —C₁₋₃alkyleneheteroaryl, —C₃₋₇cycloalkyl, —CH(C₁₋₄alkyl)OC(O)R^(1aa), —C₀₋₆alkylenemorpholine,

where R^(1aa) is as defined for formula I. In one aspect of the invention, these compounds may find particular utility as prodrugs or as intermediates in the synthetic procedures described herein. In one particular embodiment, R¹ is —COOR^(1a) and R^(1a) is —C₁₋₆alkyl. In another aspect, these embodiments have formula II, IIa, IIb, IIc, IId, III, IIIa, or IIIb.

In one particular embodiment, R¹ is selected from —COOR^(1a) and tetrazol-5-yl, where R^(1a) is H or —C₁₋₆alkyl. In another aspect, this embodiment has formula II, IIa, IIb, IIc, IId, III, IIIa, or IIIb.

In one embodiment, R⁵ is selected from —C₀₋₃alkylene-SR^(5a), —C₀₋₃alkylene-C(O)NR^(5b)R^(5c), and —C₀₋₃alkylene-NR^(5b)—C(O)R^(5d), —NH—C₀₋₁alkylene-P(O)(OR^(5e))₂, —C₀₋₃alkylene-P(O)OR^(5e)R^(5f), —C₀₋₂alkylene-CHR^(5g)—COOH, and —C₀₋₃alkylene-C(O)NR^(5h)—CHR^(5i)—COOH; where R^(5a) is H, R^(5b) is —OH, R^(5c) is H, R^(5d) is H, R^(5e) is H; and R^(5f), R^(5g), R^(5h), R^(5i) are as defined for formula 1. More particularly, in one embodiment, R⁵ is selected from —C₀₋₁alkyl ene-SH, —C₀₋₁alkylene-C(O)—N(OH)H, and —C₀₋₃alkylene-N(OH)—C(O)H. In another embodiment, R⁵ is selected from —C₀₋₃alkylene-SR^(5a) and —C₀₋₃alkylene-C(O)NR^(5b)R^(5c), where R^(5a) is H; R^(5b) is —OH. In one particular embodiment, R^(5c) is H. In another aspect, these embodiments have formula II, IIa, IIb, IIc, IId, III, IIIa, or IIIb.

In yet another embodiment, R⁵ is selected from —C₀₋₃alkylene-SR^(5a), —C₀₋₃alkylene-C(O)NR^(5b)R^(5c), —C₀₋₃alkylene-NR^(5b)—C(O)R^(5d), —NH—C₀₋₁alkylene-P(O)(OR^(5e))₂, —C₀₋₃alkylene-P(O)OR^(5e)R^(5f), and —C₀₋₃alkylene-S—SR^(5j); where R^(5a) is —C(O)—R^(5aa); R^(5b) is H, —OC(O)R^(5ba), —CH₂COOH, —O-benzyl, pyridyl, or —OC(S)NR^(5bb)R^(5bc); R^(5e) is —C₁₋₆alkyl, —C₁₋₃alkylenearyl, —C₁₋₃alkyleneheteroaryl, —C₃₋₇cycloalkyl, —CH(CH₃)—O—C(O)R^(5ea),

and where R^(5aa), R^(5ba), R^(5bb), R^(5bc), R^(5c), R^(5d), R^(5ea), R^(5f) and R^(5j) are as defined for formula I. In one aspect of the invention, these compounds may find particular utility as prodrugs or as intermediates in the synthetic procedures described herein. In another aspect, these embodiments have formula II, IIa, IIb, IIc, IId, III, IIIa, or IIIb.

In one particular embodiment, R⁵ is selected from —C₀₋₃alkylene-SR^(5a), —C₀₋₃alkylene-C(O)NR^(5b)R^(5c), and —C₀₋₂alkylene-CHR^(5g)—COOH; where R^(5a) is H or —C(O)—C₁₋₆alkyl; R^(5b) is H, —OH, —OC(O)—C₁₋₆alkyl, or —O-benzyl; R^(5c) is H or —C₁₋₆alkyl; and R^(5g) is —OH. In another aspect, this embodiment has formula II, IIa, IIb, IIc, IId, III, IIIa, or IIIb.

In another embodiment, R¹ is selected from —COOH, —NHSO₂R^(1b), —SO₂NHR^(1d), —SO₂OH, —C(O)NH—SO₂R^(1c), —P(O)(OH)₂, —CN, —O—CH(R^(1e))—COOH, tetrazol-5-yl,

R⁵ is selected from —C₀₋₃alkylene-SR^(5a), —C₀₋₃alkylene-C(O)NR^(5b)R^(5c), and —C₀₋₃alkylene-NR^(5b)—C(O)R^(5d), —NH—C₀₋₁alkylene-P(O)(OR^(5e))₂, —C₀₋₃alkylene-P(O)OR^(5e)R^(5f), —C₀₋₂alkylene-CHR^(5g)—COOH, and —C₀₋₃alkylene-C(O)NR^(5h)—CHR^(5i)—COOH; R^(5a) is H, R^(5b) is —OH, R^(5c) is H, R^(5d) is H, R^(5e) is H; and R^(5f), R^(5g), R^(5h), R^(5i) are as defined for formula I. In one particular embodiment, R¹ is selected from —COOH, —SO₂NHR^(1d), and tetrazol-5-yl; and R⁵ is selected from —C₀₋₃alkylene-SH, and —C₀₋₃alkylene-C(O)N(OH)H. In another aspect, these embodiments have formula II, IIa, IIb, IIc, IId, III, IIIa, or IIIb.

In another embodiment, R¹ is —COOR^(1a), where R^(1a) is —C₁₋₆alkyl, —C₁₋₃alkylenearyl, —C₁₋₃alkyleneheteroaryl, —C₃₋₇cycloalkyl, —CH(C₁₋₄alkyl)OC(O)R^(1aa), —C₀₋₆alkylenemorpholine,

R⁵ is selected from —C₀₋₃alkylene-SR^(5a), —C₀₋₃alkylene-C(O)NR^(5b)R^(5c), —C₀₋₃alkylene-NR^(5b)—C(O)R^(5d), —NH—C₀₋₁alkylene-P(O)(OR^(5e))₂, —C₀₋₃alkylene-P(O)OR^(5e)R^(5f), and —C₀₋₃alkylene-S—SR^(5j); where R^(5a) is —C(O)—R^(5aa); R^(5b) is H, —OC(O)R^(5ba), —CH₂COOH, —O-benzyl, pyridyl, or —OC(S)NR^(5bb)R^(5bc); R^(e) is —C₁₋₆alkyl, —C₁₋₃alkylenearyl, —C₁₋₃alkyleneheteroaryl, —C₃₋₇cycloalkyl, —CH(CH₃)—O—C(O)R^(5ea),

and where R^(5aa), R^(5ba), R^(5bb), R^(5bc), R^(5c), R^(5d), R^(5ea), R^(5f), and R^(5i) are as defined for formula I. In another aspect, this embodiment has formula II, IIa, IIb, IIc, IId, III, IIIa, or IIIb.

A particular group of compounds of formula I are those disclosed in U.S. Provisional Application No. 61/135,806, filed on Jul. 24, 2008. This group includes compounds of formula I′:

where: Q is —C(R²)— or —N—; R⁵ is selected from —C₀₋₃alkylene-SR^(5a), —C₀₋₃alkylene-C(O)NR^(5b)R^(5c), —C₀₋₃alkylene-NR^(5b)—C(O)R^(5d), —NH—C₀₋₁alkylene-P(O)(OR^(5e))₂, —C₀₋₃alkylene-P(O)OR^(5e)R^(5f), —C₀₋₂alkylene-CHR^(5g)—COOH, —C₀₋₃alkylene-C(O)NR^(5h)—CHR^(5i)—COOH, and —C₀₋₃alkylene-S—SR^(5j); where R^(5g) is H, —C₁₋₆alkyl, —C₁₋₃alkylenearyl, or —CH₂—O—(CH₂)₂—O—CH₃; and r, Ar, R², R³, R^(5a), R^(5b), R^(5c), R^(5d), R^(5e), R^(5f), R^(5h), R^(5i), R⁶ and R⁷ are as defined for formula I; or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof.

In addition, particular compounds of formula I that are of interest include those set forth in the Examples below, as well a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof.

DEFINITIONS

When describing the compounds, compositions, methods and processes of the invention, the following terms have the following meanings unless otherwise indicated. Additionally, as used herein, the singular forms “a,” “an,” and “the” include the corresponding plural forms unless the context of use clearly dictates otherwise. The terms “comprising”, “including,” and “having” are intended to be inclusive and mean that there may be additional elements other than the listed elements. All numbers expressing quantities of ingredients, properties such as molecular weight, reaction conditions, and so forth used herein are to be understood as being modified in all instances by the term “about,” unless otherwise indicated. Accordingly, the numbers set forth herein are approximations that may vary depending upon the desired properties sought to be obtained by the present invention. At least, and not as an attempt to limit the application of the doctrine of equivalents to the scope of the claims, each number should at least be construed in light of the reported significant digits and by applying ordinary rounding techniques.

The term “alkyl” means a monovalent saturated hydrocarbon group which may be linear or branched. Unless otherwise defined, such alkyl groups typically contain from 1 to 10 carbon atoms and include, for example, —C₁₋₄alkyl, —C₁₋₆alkyl, and —C₁₋₁₀alkyl. Representative alkyl groups include, by way of example, methyl, ethyl, n-propyl, isopropyl, n-butyl, s-butyl, isobutyl, t-butyl, n-pentyl, n-hexyl, n-heptyl, n-octyl, n-nonyl, n-decyl and the like.

When a specific number of carbon atoms is intended for a particular term used herein, the number of carbon atoms is shown preceding the term as subscript. For example, the term “—C₁₋₆alkyl” means an alkyl group having from 1 to 6 carbon atoms, and the term “—C₃₋₆cycloalkyl” means a cycloalkyl group having from 3 to 6 carbon atoms, respectively, where the carbon atoms are in any acceptable configuration.

The term “alkylene” means a divalent saturated hydrocarbon group that may be linear or branched. Unless otherwise defined, such alkylene groups typically contain from 0 to 10 carbon atoms and include, for example, —C₀₋₁alkylene-, —C₀₋₂alkylene-, —C₀₋₃alkylene-, —C₀₋₅alkylene-, —C₀₋₆alkylene-, —C₁₋₂alkylene- and —C₁₋₁₂alkylene-. Representative alkylene groups include, by way of example, methylene, ethane-1,2-diyl (“ethylene”), propane-1,2-diyl, propane-1,3-diyl, butane-1,4-diyl, pentane-1,5-diyl and the like. It is understood that when the alkylene term include zero carbons such as —C₀₋₁alkylene- or —C₀₋₅alkylene-, such terms are intended to include the absence of carbon atoms, that is, the alkylene group is not present except for a covalent bond attaching the groups separated by the alkylene term.

The term “alkylthio” means a monovalent group of the formula —S-alkyl, where alkyl is as defined herein. Unless otherwise defined, such alkylthio groups typically contain from 1 to 10 carbon atoms and include, for example, —S—C₁₋₄alkyl and —S—C₁₋₆alkyl. Representative alkylthio groups include, by way of example, ethylthio, propylthio, isopropylthio, butylthio, s-butylthio and t-butylthio.

The term “alkenyl” means a monovalent unsaturated hydrocarbon group which may be linear or branched and which has at least one, and typically 1, 2 or 3, carbon-carbon double bonds. Unless otherwise defined, such alkenyl groups typically contain from 2 to 10 carbon atoms and include, for example, —C₂₋₄alkenyl and —C₂₋₁₀alkenyl. Representative alkenyl groups include, by way of example, ethenyl, n-propenyl, isopropenyl, n-but-2-enyl, n-hex-3-enyl and the like. The term “alkenylene” means a divalent alkenyl group, and includes groups such as —C₂₋₃alkenylene-.

The term “alkoxy” means a monovalent group of the formula —O-alkyl, where alkyl is as defined herein. Unless otherwise defined, such alkoxy groups typically contain from 1 to 10 carbon atoms and include, for example, —O—C₁₋₄alkyl and —O—C₁₋₆alkyl. Representative alkoxy groups include, by way of example, methoxy, ethoxy, n-propoxy, isopropoxy, n-butoxy, sec-butoxy, isobutoxy, t-butoxy and the like.

The term “alkynyl” means a monovalent unsaturated hydrocarbon group which may be linear or branched and which has at least one, and typically 1, 2 or 3, carbon-carbon triple bonds. Unless otherwise defined, such alkynyl groups typically contain from 2 to 10 carbon atoms and include, for example, —C₂₋₄alkynyl and —C₃₋₁₀alkynyl. Representative alkynyl groups include, by way of example, ethynyl, n-propynyl, n-but-2-ynyl, n-hex-3-ynyl and the like. The term “alkynylene” means a divalent alkynyl group and includes groups such as —C₂₋₃alkynylene.

Amino acid residues are often designated as —C(O)—CHR—NH—, where the R moiety is referred to as the “amino acid side chain.” Thus, for the amino acid valine, HO—C(O)—CH[—CH(CH₃)₂]—NH₂, the side chain is —CH(CH₃)₂. The /term “amino acid side chain” is intended to include side chains of the twenty common naturally occurring amino acids: alanine, arginine, asparagine, aspartic acid, cysteine, glutamic acid, glutamine, glycine, histidine, isoleucine, leucine, lysine, methionine, phenylalanine, proline, serine, threonine, tryptophan, tyrosine, and valine. Of particular interest are the side chains of non-polar amino acids such as isoleucine, leucine, and valine.

The term “aryl” means a monovalent aromatic hydrocarbon having a single ring (for example, phenyl) or fused rings. Fused ring systems include those that are fully unsaturated (for example, naphthalene) as well as those that are partially unsaturated (for example, 1,2,3,4-tetrahydronaphthalene). Unless otherwise defined, such aryl groups typically contain from 6 to 10 carbon ring atoms and include, for example, —C₆₋₁₀aryl. Representative aryl groups include, by way of example, phenyl and naphthalene-1-yl, naphthalene-2-yl, and the like. The term “arylene” means a divalent awl group such as phenylene.

The term “cycloalkyl” means a monovalent saturated carbocyclic hydrocarbon group. Unless otherwise defined, such cycloalkyl groups typically contain from 3 to 10 carbon atoms and include, for example, —C₃₋₅cycloalkyl, —C₃₋₆cycloalkyl and —C₃₋₇cycloalkyl. Representative cycloalkyl groups include, by way of example, cyclopropyl, cyclobutyl, cyclopentyl, cyclohexyl and the like. The term “cycloalkylene” means a divalent aryl group such as —C₄₋₈cycloalkylene.

The term “halo” means fluoro, chloro, bromo and iodo.

As used herein, the phrase “having the formula” or “having the structure” is not intended to be limiting and is used in the same way that the term “comprising” is commonly used.

The term “heteroaryl” means a monovalent aromatic group having a single ring or two fused rings and containing in the ring(s) at least one heteroatom (typically 1 to 3 heteroatoms) selected from nitrogen, oxygen or sulfur. Unless otherwise defined, such heteroaryl groups typically contain from 5 to 10 total ring atoms and include, for example, —C₂₋₉heteroaryl. Representative heteroaryl groups include, by way of example, monovalent species of pyrrole, imidazole, thiazole, oxazole, furan, thiophene, triazole, pyrazole, isoxazole, isothiazole, pyridine, pyrazine, pyridazine, pyrimidine, triazine, indole, benzofuran, benzothiophene, benzoimidazole, benzthiazole, quinoline, isoquinoline, quinazoline, quinoxaline and the like, where the point of attachment is at any available carbon or nitrogen ring atom.

The term “optionally substituted” means that group in question may be unsubstituted or it may be substituted one or several times, such as 1 to 3 times or 1 to 5 times. For example, an alkyl group that is “optionally substituted” with 1 to 5 fluoro atoms, may be unsubstituted, or it may contain 1, 2, 3, 4, or 5 fluoro atoms.

The term “pharmaceutically acceptable” refers to a material that is not biologically or otherwise unacceptable when used in the invention. For example, the term “pharmaceutically acceptable carrier” refers to a material that can be incorporated into a composition and administered to a patient without causing unacceptable biological effects or interacting in an unacceptable manner with other components of the composition. Such pharmaceutically acceptable materials typically have met the required standards of toxicological and manufacturing testing, and include those materials identified as suitable inactive ingredients by the U.S. Food and Drug administration.

The term “pharmaceutically acceptable salt” means a salt prepared from a base or an acid which is acceptable for administration to a patient, such as a mammal (for example, salts having acceptable mammalian safety for a given dosage regime). However, it is understood that the salts covered by the invention are not required to be pharmaceutically acceptable salts, such as salts of intermediate compounds that are not intended for administration to a patient. Pharmaceutically acceptable salts can be derived from pharmaceutically acceptable inorganic or organic bases and from pharmaceutically acceptable inorganic or organic acids. In addition, when a compound of formula I contains both a basic moiety, such as an amine, pyridine or imidazole, and an acidic moiety such as a carboxylic acid or tetrazole, zwitterions may be formed and are included within the term “salt” as used herein. Salts derived from pharmaceutically acceptable inorganic bases include ammonium, calcium, copper, ferric, ferrous, lithium, magnesium, manganic, manganous, potassium, sodium, and zinc salts, and the like. Salts derived from pharmaceutically acceptable organic bases include salts of primary, secondary and tertiary amines, including substituted amines, cyclic amines, naturally-occurring amines and the like, such as arginine, betaine, caffeine, choline, N,N′-dibenzylethylenediamine, diethylamine, 2-diethylaminoethanol, 2-dimethylaminoethanol, ethanolamine, ethylenediamine, N-ethylmorpholine, N-ethylpiperidine, glucamine, glucosamine, histidine, hydrabamine, isopropylamine, lysine, methylglucamine, morpholine, piperazine, piperadine, polyamine resins, procaine, purines, theobromine, triethylamine, trimethylamine, tripropylamine, tromethamine and the like. Salts derived from pharmaceutically acceptable inorganic acids include salts of boric, carbonic, hydrohalic (hydrobromic, hydrochloric, hydrofluoric or hydroiodic), nitric, phosphoric, sulfamic and sulfuric acids. Salts derived from pharmaceutically acceptable organic acids include salts of aliphatic hydroxyl acids (for example, citric, gluconic, glycolic, lactic, lactobionic, malic, and tartaric acids), aliphatic monocarboxylic acids (for example, acetic, butyric, formic, propionic and trifluoroacetic acids), amino acids (for example, aspartic and glutamic acids), aromatic carboxylic acids (for example, benzoic, p-chlorobenzoic, diphenylacetic, gentisic, hippuric, and triphenylacetic acids), aromatic hydroxyl acids (for example, o-hydroxybenzoic, p-hydroxybenzoic, 1-hydroxynaphthalene-2-carboxylic and 3-hydroxynaphthalene-2-carboxylic acids), ascorbic, dicarboxylic acids (for example, fumaric, maleic, oxalic and succinic acids), glucoronic, mandelic, mucic, nicotinic, orotic, pamoic, pantothenic, sulfonic acids (for example, benzenesulfonic, camphosulfonic, edisylic, ethanesulfonic, isethionic, methanesulfonic, naphthalenesulfonic, naphthalene-1,5-disulfonic, naphthalene-2,6-disulfonic and p-toluenesulfonic acids), xinafoic acid, and the like.

The term “protected derivatives thereof” means a derivative of the specified compound in which one or more functional groups of the compound are protected or blocked from undergoing undesired reactions with a protecting or blocking group. Functional groups that may be protected include, by way of example, carboxy groups, amino groups, hydroxyl groups, thiol groups, carbonyl groups and the like. Representative protecting groups for carboxy groups include esters (such as a p-methoxybenzyl ester), amides and hydrazides; for amino groups, carbamates (such as t-butoxycarbonyl) and amides; for hydroxyl groups, ethers and esters; for thiol groups, thioethers and thioesters; for carbonyl groups, acetals and ketals; and the like. Such protecting groups are well known to those skilled in the art and are described, for example, in T. W. Greene and G. M. Wuts, Protecting Groups in Organic Synthesis, Third Edition, Wiley, New York, 1999, and references cited therein.

As used herein, the term “prodrug” is intended to mean an inactive (or significantly less active) precursor of a drug that is converted into its active form in the body under physiological conditions, for example, by normal metabolic processes. The term is also intended to include certain protected derivatives of compounds of formula I that may be made prior to a final deprotection stage. Such compounds may not possess pharmacological activity at AT₁ and/or NEP, but may be administered orally or parenterally and thereafter metabolized in the body to form compounds of the invention which are pharmacologically active at AT₁ and/or NEP. Thus, all protected derivatives and prodrugs of compounds formula I are included within the scope of the invention. Prodrugs of compounds of formula 1 having a free carboxyl, sulfhydryl or hydroxy group can be readily synthesized by techniques that are well known in the art. These prodrug derivatives are then converted by solvolysis or under physiological conditions to be the free carboxyl, sulfhydryl and/or hydroxy compounds. Exemplary prodrugs include: esters including C₁₋₆alkylesters and aryl-C₁₋₆alkylesters, carbonate esters, hemi-esters, phosphate esters, nitro esters, sulfate esters, sulfoxides, amides, carbamates, azo-compounds, phosphamides, glycosides, ethers, acetals, ketals, and disulfides. In one embodiment, the compounds of formula I have a free sulfhydryl or a free carboxyl and the prodrug is an ester derivative thereof, i.e., the prodrug is a thioester such as —SC(O)CH₃ or an ester such as —C(O)OCH₃.

The term “solvate” means a complex or aggregate formed by one or more molecules of a solute, for example, a compound of formula I or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof, and one or more molecules of a solvent. Such solvates are typically crystalline solids having a substantially fixed molar ratio of solute and solvent. Representative solvents include, by way of example, water, methanol, ethanol, isopropanol, acetic acid and the like. When the solvent is water, the solvate formed is a hydrate.

The term “therapeutically effective amount” means an amount sufficient to effect treatment when administered to a patient in need thereof, that is, the amount of drug needed to obtain the desired therapeutic effect. For example, a therapeutically effective amount for treating hypertension is an amount of compound needed to, for example, reduce, suppress, eliminate or prevent the symptoms of hypertension, or to treat the underlying cause of hypertension. In one embodiment, a therapeutically effective amount is that amount of drug needed to reduce blood pressure or the amount of drug needed to maintain normal blood pressure. On the other hand, the term “effective amount” means an amount sufficient to obtain a desired result, which may not necessary be a therapeutic result. For example, when studying a system comprising an AT₁ receptor, an “effective amount” may be the amount needed to antagonize the receptor.

The term “treating” or “treatment” as used herein means the treating or treatment of a disease or medical condition (such as hypertension) in a patient, such as a mammal (particularly a human) that includes one or more of the following: (a) preventing the disease or medical condition from occurring, that is, by prophylactic treatment of a patient; (b) ameliorating the disease or medical condition such as by eliminating or causing regression of the disease or medical condition in a patient; (c) suppressing the disease or medical condition such as by slowing or arresting the development of the disease or medical condition in a patient; or (d) alleviating the symptoms of the disease or medical condition in a patient. For example, the term “treating hypertension” would include preventing hypertension from occurring, ameliorating hypertension, suppressing hypertension, and alleviating the symptoms of hypertension (for example, lowering blood pressure). The term “patient” is intended to include those mammals, such as humans, that are in need of treatment or disease prevention or that are presently being treated for disease prevention or treatment of a specific disease or medical condition, as well as test subjects in which compounds of the invention are being evaluated or being used in a assay, for example an animal model.

All other terms used herein are intended to have their ordinary meaning as understood by those of ordinary skill in the art to which they pertain.

General Synthetic Procedures

Compounds of the invention can be prepared from readily available starting materials using the following general methods, the procedures set forth in the Examples, or by using other methods, reagents, and starting materials that are known to those of ordinary skill in the art. Although the following procedures may illustrate a particular embodiment of the invention, it is understood that other embodiments of the invention can be similarly prepared using the same or similar methods or by using other methods, reagents and starting materials known to those of ordinary skill in the art. It will also be appreciated that where typical or preferred process conditions (for example, reaction temperatures, times, mole ratios of reactants, solvents, pressures, etc.) are given, other process conditions can also be used unless otherwise stated. While optimum reaction conditions will typically vary depending on various reaction parameters such as the particular reactants, solvents and quantities used, those of ordinary skill in the art can readily determine suitable reaction conditions using routine optimization procedures.

Additionally, as will be apparent to those skilled in the art, conventional protecting groups may be necessary or desired to prevent certain functional groups from undergoing undesired reactions. The choice of a suitable protecting group for a particular functional group as well as suitable conditions and reagents for protection and deprotection of such functional groups are well-known in the art. Protecting groups other than those illustrated in the procedures described herein may be used, if desired. For example, numerous protecting groups, and their introduction and removal, are described in T. W. Greene and G. M. Wuts, Protecting Groups in Organic Synthesis, Third Edition, Wiley, New York, 1999, and references cited therein. More specifically, the following abbreviations and reagents are used in the schemes presented below:

P¹ represents an “amino-protecting group,” a term used herein to mean a protecting group suitable for preventing undesired reactions at an amino group. Representative amino-protecting groups include, but are not limited to, t-butoxycarbonyl (BOC), trityl (Tr), benzyloxycarbonyl (Cbz), 9-fluorenylmethoxycarbonyl (Fmoc), formyl, trimethylsilyl (TMS), t-butyldimethylsilyl (TBDMS), and the like. Standard deprotection techniques are used to remove the P¹ group. For example, a BOC group can be removed using an acidic reagent such as TFA in DCM or HCl in 1,4-dioxane, while a Cbz group can be removed by employing catalytic hydrogenation conditions such as H₂ (1 atm) and 10% Pd/C in an alcoholic solvent (“H₂/Pd/C”).

P² represents a “carboxy-protecting group,” a term used herein to mean a protecting group suitable for preventing undesired reactions at a carboxy group. Representative carboxy-protecting groups include, but are not limited to, methyl, ethyl, t-butyl, benzyl (Bn), p-methoxybenzyl (PMB), 9-fluorenylmethyl (Fm), trimethylsilyl (TMS), t-butyldimethylsilyl (TBDMS), diphenylmethyl (benzhydryl, DPM) and the like. Standard deprotection techniques and reagents are used to remove the P² group, and may vary depending upon which group is used. For example, sodium or lithium hydroxide is commonly used when P² is methyl, an acid such as TFA or HCl is commonly used when P² is t-butyl, and H₂/Pd/C may be used when P² is benzyl.

P³ represents a “thiol-protecting group,” a term used herein to mean a protecting group suitable for preventing undesired reactions at a thiol group. Representative thiol-protecting groups include, but are not limited to, ethers, esters such as —C(O)CH₃, and the like. Standard deprotection techniques and reagents such as NaOH, primary alkylamines, and hydrazine, may be used to remove the P³ group.

P⁴ represents a “tetrazole-protecting group,” a term used herein to mean a protecting group suitable for preventing undesired reactions at a tetrazole group. Representative tetrazole-protecting groups include, but are not limited to trityl and diphenylmethyl. Standard deprotection techniques and reagents such as TFA in DCM or HCl in 1,4-dioxane may be used to remove the P⁴ group.

P⁵ represents a “hydroxyl-protecting group,” a term that is used herein to mean a protecting group suitable for preventing undesired reactions at a hydroxyl group. Representative hydroxyl-protecting groups include, but are not limited to C₁₋₆alkyls, silyl groups including triC₁₋₆alkylsilyl groups, such as trimethylsilyl (TMS), triethylsilyl (TES), and tert-butyldimethylsilyl (TBDMS); esters (acyl groups) including C₁₋₆alkanoyl groups, such as formyl, acetyl, and pivaloyl, and aromatic acyl groups such as benzoyl; arylmethyl groups such as benzyl (Bn), p-methoxybenzyl (PMB), 9-fluorenylmethyl (Fm), and diphenylmethyl (benzhydryl, DPM); and the like. Standard deprotection techniques and reagents are used to remove the P⁵ group, and may vary depending upon which group is used. For example, H₂/Pd/C is commonly used when P⁵ is benzyl, while NaOH is commonly used when P⁵ is an acyl group.

P⁶ represents a “sulfonamide-protecting group,” a term that is used herein to mean a protecting group suitable for preventing undesired reactions at a sulfonamide group. Representative sulfonamide-protecting groups include, but are not limited to t-butyl and acyl groups. Exemplary acyl groups include aliphatic lower acyl groups such as the formyl, acetyl, phenylacetyl, butyryl, isobutyryl, valeryl, isovaleryl and pivaloyl groups, and aromatic acyl groups such as the benzoyl and 4-acetoxybenzoyl. Standard deprotection techniques and reagents are used to remove the P⁶ group, and may vary depending upon which group is used. For example, HCl is commonly used when P⁶ is t-butyl, while NaOH is commonly used when P⁶ is an acyl group.

P⁷ represents a “phosphate-protecting group or phosphinate-protecting group,” a term used herein to mean a protecting group suitable for preventing undesired reactions at a phosphate or phosphinate group. Representative phosphate and phosphinate protecting groups include, but are not limited to C₁₋₄alkyls, aryl (for example, phenyl) and substituted aryls (for example, chlorophenyl and methylphenyl). The protected group can be represented by —P(O)(OR)₂, where R is a group such as a C₁₋₆alkyl or phenyl. Standard deprotection techniques and reagents such as TMS-I/2,6-lutidine, and H₂/Pd/C are used to remove the P⁷ group such as ethyl, and benzyl, respectively.

In addition, L is used to designate a “leaving group,” a term used herein to mean a functional group or atom which can be displaced by another functional group or atom in a substitution reaction, such as a nucleophilic substitution reaction. By way of example, representative leaving groups include chloro, bromo and iodo groups; sulfonic ester groups, such as mesylate, triflate, tosylate, brosylate, nosylate and the like; and acyloxy groups, such as acetoxy, trifluoroacetoxy and the like.

Suitable bases for use in these schemes include, by way of illustration and not limitation, potassium carbonate, calcium carbonate, sodium carbonate, triethylamine, pyridine, 1,8-diazabicyclo-[5.4.0]undec-7-ene (DBU), N,N-diisopropylethylamine (DIPEA), sodium hydroxide, potassium hydroxide, potassium t-butoxide, and metal hydrides.

Suitable inert diluents or solvents for use in these schemes include, by way of illustration and not limitation, tetrahydrofuran (THF), acetonitrile (MeCN), N,N-dimethylformamide (DMF), dimethyl sulfoxide (DMSO), toluene, dichloromethane (DCM), chloroform (CHCl₃), carbon tetrachloride (CCl₄), 1,4-dioxane, methanol, ethanol, water, and the like.

Suitable carboxylic acid/amine coupling reagents include benzotriazol-1-yloxytris(dimethylamino)phosphonium hexafluorophosphate (BOP), benzotriazol-1-yloxytripyrrolidinophosphonium hexafluorophosphate (PyBOP), O-(7-azabenzotriazol-1-yl-N,N,N′,N′-tetramethyluronium hexafluorophosphate (HATU), dicyclohexylcarbodiimide (DCC), N-(3-dimethylaminopropyl)-N′-ethylcarbodiimide (EDC), carbonyldiimidazole (CDI), and the like. Coupling reactions are conducted in an inert diluent in the presence of a base such as DIPEA, and are performed under conventional amide bond-forming conditions.

All reactions are typically conducted at a temperature within the range of about −78° C. to 100° C., for example at room temperature. Reactions may be monitored by use of thin layer chromatography (TLC), high performance liquid chromatography (HPLC), and/or LCMS until completion. Reactions may be complete in minutes, or may take hours, typically from 1-2 hours and up to 48 hours. Upon completion, the resulting mixture or reaction product may be further treated in order to obtain the desired product. For example, the resulting mixture or reaction product may be subjected to one or more of the following procedures: concentrating or partitioning (for example, between EtOAc and water or between 5% THF in EtOAc and 1M phosphoric acid); extraction (for example, with EtOAc, CHCl₃, DCM, chloroform); washing (for example, with saturated aqueous NaCl, saturated NaHCO₃, Na₂CO₃ (5%), CHCl₃ or 1M NaOH); drying (for example, over MgSO₄, over Na₂SO₄, or in vacuo); filtering; crystallizing (for example, from EtOAc and hexane); being concentrated (for example, in vacuo); and/or purification (e.g., silica gel chromatography, flash chromatography, preparative HPLC, reverse phase-HPLC, or crystallization).

By way of illustration, compounds of formula I, as well as their salts, solvates, and prodrugs can be prepared by one or more of the following exemplary processes.

Scheme I Peptide Coupling Reaction and Optional Deprotection

The X moiety contains one or more amide groups, and therefore the compounds of the invention may be formed by a coupling reaction under conventional amide bond-forming conditions, followed by a deprotection step if needed. In Scheme I, the A and B moieties couple to form X, and the sum of a and b is in the range of 0 to 11. Thus, one moiety comprises an amine group and one moiety comprises a carboxylic acid group, i.e., A is —NH₂ and B is —COOH or A is —COOH and B is —NH₂.

For example, to synthesize a compound of formula I where X is —CONH—, A would be —COOH and B would be —NH₂. Similarly, A as —NH₂ and B as —COOH would couple to form —NHCO— as the X moiety. A and B can be readily modified if a longer X is desired, whether it contains an alkylene portion or additional amide groups. For example, A as —CH₂NH₂ and B as —COOH would couple to form —CH₂NHCO— as the X moiety.

It is understood that the carbon atoms in the —(CH₂)_(a) and —(CH₂)_(b) groups make up the “X” linker. Therefore, these carbon atoms may be substituted with one or more Rob groups. Furthermore, one —CH₂— group in the —(CH₂)_(a) or the —(CH₂)_(b) group may be replaced with a —C₃₋₈cycloalkylene-, —CR^(4d)═CH—, or —CH═CR^(4d)— group.

Ar* represents Ar—R^(1*), where R^(1*) may represent R¹ as defined herein, or a protected form of R¹ (for example, -tetrazol-5-yl-P⁴ or —C(O)O—P² such as —C(O)O—C₁₋₆alkyl), or a precursor of R¹ (for example, —CN that is then converted to tetrazole, or nitro that is then converted to amino from which the desired R¹ is prepared). R^(5*) represents R⁵ as defined herein, or a protected form of R⁵. Therefore, when R^(1*) represents R¹ and R^(5*) represents R⁵, the reaction is complete after the coupling step.

On the other hand, when R^(1*) represents a protected form of R¹ and/or R^(5*) represents a protected form of R⁵, a subsequent global or sequential deprotection step would yield the non-protected compound. Similarly, when R^(1*) represents a precursor of R¹, a subsequent conversion step would yield the desired compound. Reagents and conditions for the deprotection vary with the nature of protecting groups in the compound. Typical deprotection conditions when R^(5*) represents C₀₋₃alkylene-S—P³, include treating the compound with NaOH in an alcoholic solvent to yield the non-protected compound. Typical deprotection conditions when R^(1*) represents C(O)O—P² where P² refers to t-butyl include treating the compound with TFA in DCM a to yield the non-protected compound. Thus, one method of preparing compounds of the invention involves coupling compounds (1) and (2), with an optional deprotection step when R^(1*) is a protected form of R¹ and/or R^(5*) is a protected form of R⁵, thus forming a compound of formula I or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof.

Examples of compound (1) include: 4′-[3-(aminomethyl)-5-propyl-1,2,4-triazol-1-ylmethyl]-biphenyl-2-carboxylic acid tert-butyl ester; 2-butyl-1-(4-methoxycarbonylbenzyl)-1H-imidazole-4-carboxylic acid; and 1-propyl-2-[2′-(1-trityl-1H-tetrazol-5-yl)-biphenyl-4-ylmethyl]-1H-imidazole-4-carboxylic acid.

Examples of compound (2) include: (R)-3-amino-N-(2,2-dimethylpropionyloxy)-4-phenylbutyramide; (R)-1-benzyl-2-hydroxycarbamoylethyl)carbamic acid; (R)-2-((R)-2-amino-3-phenylpropyldisulfanyl)-1-benzylethylamine; (S)-2-acetylsulfanyl-4-methylpentanoic acid; 2-acetylsulfanylmethyl-4-methylpentanoic acid; (S)-2-acetylsulfanylmethyl-4-methylpentanoic acid; (R)-2-(2-benzyloxycarbamoyl-3-phenypropionylamino)succinic acid 1-methyl ester; 2-(2,2-dimethyl-propionyloxycarbamoyl)-4-methylpentanoic acid; and (2R,3R)-3-amino-2-hydroxy-4-phenylbutyric acid.

When Z is:

compound (1) can be prepared by the following reaction:

Compound (2) is reacted with compound (1a) and potassium carbonate to yield the formyl intermediate. The formyl intermediate will often be a mixture of regioisomers:

which can then be carried forward until the compound of formula I is prepared, at which point the regioisomers can be easily separated, for example, by reverse phase HPLC.

To prepare compound (1), where A is —COOH, the formyl intermediate, in alcohol, is reacted with an aqueous solution of sodium chlorite and sodium dihydrogen phosphate to yield compound (1). To prepare compound (1), where A is —NH₂, the formyl intermediate first undergoes oxime formation by reaction with hydroxylamine hydrochloride in pyridine to form an oxime intermediate, which is then reacted with sodium cyanoborohydride, ammonium acetate, and titanium(III) chloride to yield compound (1).

Compound (1a) is typically commercially available and examples include 2-butyl-3H-imidazole-4-carbaldehyde.

When Z is:

compound (1), for example where A is —NH₂, can be prepared by the following reaction:

Compound (1b) is combined with a suspension of NaH (1.1 equiv), which is then reacted with compound (2) (1 equiv) to yield the protected intermediate, which can then be deprotected. The intermediate may be formed as a mixture of regioisomers:

which can then be carried forward until the compound of formula I is prepared, at which point the regioisomers can be easily separated, for example, by reverse phase HPLC.

Compound (1b), where A* represents a protected from of A, can be readily prepared by techniques that are well known in the art and/or is commercially available. One exemplary synthetic method is as follows:

An appropriate imidate is combined with dry MeOH and the hydrazide (1 equiv) to yield compound (1a). Examples of the imidate starting material include ethyl butyrimidate hydrochloride (R₃=butyl). Examples of the hydrazide starting material include benzyloxycarbonylglycylhydrazide (a=1, A*=—NHC(O)O-benzyl). Examples of compound (1a′) include (5-propyl-4H-1,2,4-triazol-3-ylmethyl)carbamic acid benzyl ester.

Compound (1), when Z is:

is readily synthesized using similar techniques or other methods as are well known in the art.

Compound (2)

The non-protected starting material, Ar—(CH₂)_(a)—H, can be prepared using synthetic methods that are reported in the literature, for example Duncia et al. (1991) J. Org. Chem. 56: 2395-400, and references cited therein. The R¹ group is first protected to form the protected intermediate, Ar*—(CH₂)_(a)—H, followed by the addition of the leaving group (L) to form compound (2), for example, by a halogenation reaction. For example, a bromination reaction of a methyl group of N-triphenylmethyl-5-[4′-methylbiphenyl-2-yl]tetrazole is described in Chao et al. (2005) J. Chinese Chem. Soc. 52:539-544. In addition, when Ar* has a —CN group, it can be subsequently converted to the desired tetrazolyl group, which may be protected. Conversion of the nitrile group is readily achieved by reaction with a suitable azide such as sodium azide, trialkyltin azide (particularly tributyltin azide) or triaryltin azide. Alternatively, Ar—(CH₂)_(a)—H, Ar*—(CH₂)_(a)—H or compound (2) may be commercially available.

Compound (2) when Ar has one of the remaining formulas is readily synthesized using similar techniques or other methods as are well known in the art. Exemplary methods of preparing compound (2) include: reacting Ar—(CH₂)_(a)—H, thionyl chloride, and potassium t-butoxide; or reacting HCl and Ar—(CH₂)_(a)—H to yield Ar*—(CH₂)_(a)—H in the presence of an alcohol, which is then combined with benzoyl peroxide and N-bromosuccinimide. Examples of Ar—(CH₂)_(a)—H include: 4′-methylbiphenyl-2-carboxylic acid; 2,3-difluoro-4-methylbenzoic acid; and 2-fluoro-4-methylbenzoic acid. Examples of Ar*—(CH₂)_(a)—H include N-triphenylmethyl-5-[4′-methylbiphenyl-2-yl]tetrazole.

Compound (2) where R¹ is —SO₂NHR^(1d) may be synthesized as follows:

The starting material, 2-bromobenzene-1-sulfonamide, is commercially available. Reaction of 2-bromobenzene-1-sulfonamide in a solvent such as DMF, with 1,1-dimethoxy-N,N-dimethylmethanamine, followed by the addition of sodium hydrogen sulfate in water, yields 2-bromo-N-[1-dimethylaminometh-(E)-ylidene]benzenesulfonamide. This compound is reacted with 4-methylphenylboronic acid to yield 4′-methylbiphenyl-2-sulfonic acid 1-dimethylaminometh-(E)-ylideneamide, then the —(CH₂)_(r)-L moiety is added, for example, by a halogenation reaction, to form compound (1b).

Compound (2) where the Ar moiety is substituted may be synthesized as follows:

The starting material, 2-bromobenzoic acid, is commercially available. Reaction of 2-bromobenzoic acid in a suitable solvent, with t-butyl alcohol, DCC and 4-dimethylaminopyridine, yields 2-bromobenzoic acid t-butyl ester. This compound is reacted with 3-fluoro-4-methylphenylboronic acid to yield 3′-fluoro-4′-methyl-biphenyl-2-carboxylic acid t-butyl ester, then the —(CH₂)_(r)-L moiety is added, for example, by a halogenation reaction, to form compound (2).

Examples of compound (2) include 5-(4′-bromomethylbiphenyl-2-yl)-1-trityl-1H-tetrazole; 4′-bromomethylbiphenyl-2-carboxylic acid t-butyl ester; 4-bromomethylbenzoic acid methyl ester; 4-bromomethyl-2,3-difluorobenzoic acid methyl ester; 4′-formyl-biphenyl-2-sulfonic acid t-butylamide; 4′-aminomethylbiphenyl-2-carboxylic acid t-butyl ester; 4′-bromomethyl-3′-fluorobiphenyl-2-carboxylic acid t-butyl ester; methyl 4-bromomethylbenzoate; and 4-bromomethylnaphthalene-1-carboxylic acid methyl ester.

Compound (3)

Compound (3) is readily synthesized by following the techniques described in the literature, for example, Neustadt et al (1994) J. Med. Chem. 37:2461-2476 and Moree et al. (1995) J. Org. Chem. 60: 5157-69, as well as by using the exemplary procedures described below. Examples of Compound (2), depicted without chirality, include:

Since compound (3) has a chiral center, it may be desirable to synthesize a particular stereoisomer, and examples are provided as follows.

Preparation of Chiral Amino Hydroxamate Compound (3^(i))

A base such as DIPEA and a coupling agent such as EDC are added to a solution of compound (3a) in DMF containing HOBt and hydroxylamine hydrochloride. Examples of compound (3a) include (R)-3-t-butoxycarbonylamino-4-phenylbutyric acid.

Preparation of Chiral Amino Sulfhydryl Dimer Compound (3^(ii))

Compound (3b) and thioacetic acid are combined with a solution of diisopropyl azodicarboxylate and triphenylphosphine to provide compound (3c). Compound (3c) is dissolved in solvent, followed by the addition of a base such as 1M LiOH to yield the compound (3d) dimer. Compound (3d) is then suspended in MeCN, concentrated, and the recovered material dissolved in 4M HCl in 1,4-dioxane to provide compound (3^(ii)). Examples of compound (3b) include ((R)-1-benzyl-2-hydroxyethyl)carbamic acid t-butyl ester.

Preparation of Chiral Sulfanyl Acid Compound (3^(iii))

Compound (3e) is formed by dissolving a compound such as D-leucine (for R⁶=isobutyl, for example) in 3M HBr (aqueous), then combined with an aqueous solution of NaNO₂ to afford compound (3e). Compound (3e) is then reacted with potassium thioacetate or sodium thioacetate to provide compound (3^(iii)). Examples of compound (3e) include (R)-2-bromo-4-methylpentanoic acid. Examples of compound (3^(iii)) include (S)-2-acetylsulfanyl-4-methylpentanoic acid.

Preparation of Sulfanyl Acid Compound (3^(iv))

A mixture of compound (3f) and diethylamine is reacted with an aqueous formaldehyde to provide compound (3g). Compound (3g) is then dissolved in 1,4-dioxane, and a 1M NaOH solution to yield compound (3h), which is then reacted with thiolacetic acid to yield compound (3^(iv)). Examples of compound (3f) include 2-benzylmalonic acid monoethyl ester (R⁶=benzyl) and 2-isobutylmalonic acid monoethyl ester (R⁶=isobutyl).

Preparation of Chiral Sulfanyl Acid Compound (3^(v))

Compound (3i), (S)-4-benzyl-2-oxazolidinone, is commercially available. Compound (3j) is also typically commercially available or can be readily synthesized. For example, R⁶—CH₂—COOH (for example, isocaproic acid or 3-phenylpropionic acid) is dissolved in methylene chloride and reacted with thionyl chloride to provide (3j). Examples of compound (3j) include 4-methylpentanoyl chloride and 3-phenylpropionyl chloride.

Compound (3i), n-butyllithium in hexanes, and compound (3j) are reacted to afford compound (3k), which is then dissolved in a suitable solvent and reacted with titanium tetrachloride and 1,3,5-trioxane to provide (3l). Compound (3l) is combined with hydrogen peroxide in water, followed by the dropwise addition of lithium hydroxide monohydrate in water. To this is added an aqueous solution of sodium sulfite followed by water and chloroform to provide (3m). Compound (3m) and thioacetic acid are then added to a mixture of triphenylphosphine and diisopropyl azodicarboxylate to provide compound (3^(v)). Examples of compound (3^(v)) include (S)-2-acetylsulfanylmethyl-4-methylpentanoic acid.

Scheme II Peptide Coupling Reaction

Compounds of formula 1 can also be prepared by coupling compound (4) and compound (1) where A is —COOH, followed by reaction with compound (5). In compounds (1) and (3), the sum of a and b is in the range of 0 to 11. In compounds (4) and (5), the [R⁵] and [[R⁵]] moieties represent portions of the R⁵ moiety. For example, if R⁵ is —CH₂C(O)N(OH)H, then [R⁵] would be —CH₂C(O)— and [[R⁵]] would be —N(OH)H.

The amide coupling of compounds (1) and (4) is typically conducted at room temperature with coupling reagents such as HOBt or pentafluorophenol, combined with EDC and DIPEA in solvents such as DMF. Compounds (4) and (5) are available commercially or can be readily synthesized by techniques that are well known in the art. Examples of compound (4) include (R)-3-amino-4-phenylbutyric acid and 3-amino-4-(3-chlorophenyl)butyric acid. Examples of compound (5) include H₂NOH, H₂NO-benzyl, and H₂NO-t-butyl.

Scheme III Prodrug Synthesis

Prodrugs can be readily synthesized using the techniques described above. In addition, prodrugs can be formed by further modifying active compounds of formula I where Ar**—COOH represents Ar—R¹ and R⁵ is —C₀₋₃alkylene-SH, as shown below:

Thus, both prodrug A and prodrug C can be readily synthesized from the corresponding active compound.

Certain intermediates described herein are believed to be novel and accordingly, such compounds are provided as further aspects of the invention including, for example, the compounds of formulas VII, VIII and IX, and a salt thereof:

where Ar* is Ar—R^(1*); Ar, r, Y, Z, Q, W, X, and R⁵⁻⁷ are as defined for formula I; and R^(1*) is selected from —C(O)O—P², —SO₂O—P⁵, —SO₂NH—P⁶, —P(O)(O—P⁷)₂, —OCH(CH₃)—C(O)O—P², —OCH(aryl)-C(O)O—P², and tetrazol-5-yl-P⁴; where P² is a carboxy-protecting group, P⁴ is a tetrazole-protecting group, P⁵ is a hydroxyl-protecting group, P⁶ is a sulfonamide-protecting group, and P⁷ is a phosphate-protecting group;

where Ar, r, Y, Z, Q, W, X, and R⁶⁻⁷ are as defined for formula I; R^(5*) is selected from —C₀₋₃alkylene-S—P³, —C₀₋₃alkylene-C(O)NH(O—P⁵), —C₀₋₃alkylene-N(O—P⁵)—C(O)R^(5d), —C₀₋₁alkylene-NHC(O)CH₂S—P³, —NH—C₀₋₁alkylene-P(O)(O—P⁷)₂, —C₀₋₃alkylene-P(O)(O—P⁷)—R^(5e), —C₀₋₂alkylene-CHR^(5f)—C(O)O—P² and —C₀₋₃alkylene-C(O)NR^(5g)—CHR^(5h)—C(O)O—P²; and R^(5d-h) are as defined for formula I; where P² is a carboxy-protecting group, P³ is a thiol-protecting group, P⁵ is a hydroxyl-protecting group, and P⁷ is a phosphate-protecting group; and

where Ar* is Ar—R^(1*); Ar, r, Y, Z, Q, W, X, and R⁶⁻⁷ are as defined for formula I; R^(1*) is selected from —C(O)O—P², —SO₂O—P⁵, —SO₂NH—P⁶, —P(O)(O—P⁷)₂, —OCH(CH₃)—C(O)O—P², —OCH(aryl)-C(O)O—P², and tetrazol-5-yl-P⁴; R^(5*) is selected from is selected from —C₀₋₃alkylene-S—P³, —C₀₋₃alkylene-C(O)NH(O—P⁵), —C₀₋₃alkylene-N(O—P⁵)—C(O)R^(5d), —C₀₋₁alkylene-NHC(O)CH₂S—P³, —NH—C₀₋₁alkylene-P(O)(O—P⁷)₂, —C₀₋₃alkylene-P(O)(O—P⁷)—R^(5e), —C₀₋₂alkylene-CHR^(5f)—C(O)O—P² and —C₀₋₃alkylene-C(O)NR^(5g)—CHR^(5h)—C(O)O—P²; and R^(5d h) are as defined for formula I; where P² is a carboxy-protecting group, P³ is a thiol-protecting group, P⁴ is a tetrazole-protecting group, P⁵ is a hydroxyl-protecting group, P⁶ is a sulfonamide-protecting group, and P⁷ is a phosphate-protecting group. Thus, another method of preparing compounds of the invention involves deprotecting a compound of formula VIII, IX, or X.

Further details regarding specific reaction conditions and other procedures for preparing representative compounds of the invention or intermediates thereof are described in the Examples set forth below.

Utility

Compounds of the invention possess angiotensin II type 1 (AT₁) receptor antagonist activity. In one embodiment, compounds of the invention are selective for inhibition of the AT₁ receptor over the AT₂ receptor. Compounds of the invention also possess neprilysin (NEP) inhibition activity, that is, the compounds are able to inhibit enzyme-substrate activity. In another embodiment, the compounds do not exhibit significant inhibitory activity of the angiotensin-converting enzyme. Compounds of formula I may be active drugs as well as prodrugs. Thus, when discussing the activity of compounds of the invention, it is understood that any such prodrugs have the expected activity once metabolized.

One measure of the affinity of a compound for the AT₁ receptor is the inhibitory constant (K_(i)) for binding to the AT₁ receptor. The pK_(i) value is the negative logarithm to base 10 of the K_(i). One measure of the ability of a compound to inhibit NEP activity is the inhibitory concentration (IC₅₀), which is the concentration of compound that results in half-maximal inhibition of substrate conversion by the NEP enzyme. The pIC₅₀ value is the negative logarithm to base 10 of the IC₅₀. Compounds of the invention that have both AT₁ receptor-antagonizing activity and NEP enzyme-inhibiting activity are of particular interest, including those that exhibit a pK_(i) at the AT₁ receptor greater than or equal to about 5.0, and exhibit a pIC₅₀ for NEP greater than or equal to about 5.0.

In one embodiment, compounds of interest have a pK_(i) at the AT₁ receptor≧ about 6.0, a pK_(i) at the AT₁ receptor≧ about 7.0, or a pK_(i) at the AT₁ receptor≧ about 8.0. Compounds of interest also include those having a pIC₅₀ for NEP≧ about 6.0 or a pIC₅₀ for NEP≧ about 7.0. In another embodiment, compounds of interest have a pK_(i) at the AT₁ receptor within the range of about 8.0-10.0 and a pIC₅₀ for NEP within the range of about 7.0-10.0.

In another embodiment, compounds of particular interest have a pK_(i) for binding to an AT₁ receptor greater than or equal to about 7.5 and a NEP enzyme pIC₅₀ greater than or equal to about 7.0. In another embodiment, compounds of interest have a pK_(i) greater than or equal to about 8.0 and a pIC₅₀ greater than or equal to about 8.0.

It is noted that in some cases, compounds of the invention, while still having dual activity, may possess either weak AT₁ receptor antagonist activity or weak NEP inhibition activity. In such cases, those of skill in the art will recognize that these compounds still have utility as primarily either a NEP inhibitor or a AT₁ receptor antagonist, respectively, or have utility as research tools.

Exemplary assays to determine properties of compounds of the invention, such as the AT₁ receptor binding and/or NEP inhibiting activity, are described in the Examples and include by way of illustration and not limitation, assays that measure AT₁ and AT₂ binding (described in Assay 1), and NEP inhibition (described in Assay 2). Useful secondary assays include assays to measure ACE inhibition (also described in Assay 2) and aminopeptidase P (APP) inhibition (described in Sulpizio et al. (2005) JPET 315:1306-1313). A pharmacodynamic assay to assess the in vivo inhibitory potencies for ACE, AT₁, and NEP in anesthetized rats is described in Assay 3 (see also Seymour et al. (1985) Hypertension 7(Suppl I):I-35-I-42 and Wigle et al. (1992) Can. J. Physiol. Pharmacol. 70:1525-1528), where AT₁ inhibition is measured as the percent inhibition of the angiotensin II pressor response, ACE inhibition is measured as the percent inhibition of the angiotensin I pressor response, and NEP inhibition is measured as increased urinary cyclic guanosine 3′,5′-monophosphate (cGMP) output. Useful in vivo assays include the conscious spontaneously hypertensive rat (SHR) model, which is a renin dependent hypertension model that is useful for measuring AT₁ receptor blocking (described in Assay 4; see also Intengan et al. (1999) Circulation 100(22):2267-2275 and Badyal et al. (2003) Indian Journal of Pharmacology 35:349-362), and the conscious desoxycorticosterone acetate-salt (DOCA-salt) rat model, which is a volume dependent hypertension model that is useful for measuring NEP activity (described in Assay 5; see also Trapani et al. (1989) J. Cardiovasc. Pharmacol. 14:419-424, Intengan et al. (1999) Hypertension 34(4):907-913, and Badyal et al. (2003) supra). Both the SHR and DOCA-salt models are useful for evaluating the ability of a test compound to reduce blood pressure. The DOCA-salt model is also useful to measure a test compound's ability to prevent or delay a rise in blood pressure. Compounds of the invention are expected to antagonize the AT₁ receptor and/or inhibit the NEP enzyme in any of the assays listed above, or assays of a similar nature. Thus, the aforementioned assays are useful in determining the therapeutic utility of compounds of the invention, for example, their utility as antihypertensive agents. Other properties and utilities of compounds of the invention can be demonstrated using other in vitro and in vivo assays well-known to those skilled in the art.

Compounds of the invention are expected to be useful for the treatment and/or prevention of medical conditions responsive to AT₁ receptor antagonism and/or NEP inhibition. Thus it is expected that patients suffering from a disease or disorder that is treated by antagonizing the AT₁ receptor and/or by inhibiting the NEP enzyme can be treated by administering a therapeutically effective amount of a compound of the invention. For example, by antagonizing the AT₁ receptor and thus interfering with the action of angiotensin II on its receptors, these compounds are expected to find utility in preventing the increase in blood pressure produced by angiotensin II, a potent vasopressor. In addition, by inhibiting NEP, the compounds are also expected to potentiate the biological effects of endogenous peptides that are metabolized by NEP, such as the natriuretic peptides, bombesin, bradykinins, calcitonin, endothelins, enkephalins, neurotensin, substance P and vasoactive intestinal peptide. For example, by potentiating the effects of the natriuretic peptides, compounds of the invention are expected to be useful to treat glaucoma. These compounds are also expected to have other physiological actions, for example, on the renal, central nervous, reproductive and gastrointestinal systems.

Compounds of the invention are expected to find utility in treating and/or preventing medical conditions such as cardiovascular and renal diseases. Cardiovascular diseases of particular interest include heart failure such as congestive heart failure, acute heart failure, chronic heart failure, and acute and chronic decompensated heart failure. Renal diseases of particular interest include diabetic nephropathy and chronic kidney disease. One embodiment of the invention relates to a method for treating hypertension, comprising administering to a patient a therapeutically effective amount of a compound of the invention. Typically, the therapeutically effective amount is the amount that is sufficient to lower the patient's blood pressure. In one embodiment, the compound is administered as an oral dosage form.

Another embodiment of the invention relates to a method for treating heart failure, comprising administering to a patient a therapeutically effective amount of a compound of the invention. Typically, the therapeutically effective amount is the amount that is sufficient to lower blood pressure and/or improve renal functions. In one embodiment, the compound is administered as an intravenous dosage form. When used to treat heart failure, the compound may be administered in combination with other therapeutic agents such as diuretics, natriuretic peptides, and adenosine receptor antagonists.

Compounds of the invention are also expected to be useful in preventative therapy, for example in preventing the progression of cardiac insufficiency after myocardial infarction, preventing arterial restenosis after angioplasty, preventing thickening of blood vessel walls after vascular operations, preventing atherosclerosis, and preventing diabetic angiopathy.

In addition, as NEP inhibitors, compounds of the invention are expected to inhibit enkephalinase, which will inhibit the degradation of endogenous enkephalins and thus such compounds may also find utility as analgesics. Due to their NEP inhibition properties, compounds of the invention are also expected to be useful as antitussive agents and antidiarrheal agents (for example, for the treatment of watery diarrhea), as well as find utility in the treatment of menstrual disorders, preterm labor, pre-eclampsia, endometriosis, reproductive disorders (for example, male and female infertility, polycystic ovarian syndrome, implantation failure), and male and female sexual dysfunction, including male erectile dysfunction and female sexual arousal disorder. More specifically, the compounds of the invention are expected to be useful in treating female sexual dysfunction, which is often defined as a female patient's difficulty or inability to find satisfaction in sexual expression. This covers a variety of diverse female sexual disorders including, by way of illustration and not limitation, hypoactive sexual desire disorder, sexual arousal disorder, orgasmic disorder and sexual pain disorder. When used to treat such disorders, especially female sexual dysfunction, compounds of the invention may be combined with one or more of the following secondary agents: PDE5 inhibitors, dopamine agonists, estrogen receptor agonists and/or antagonists, androgens, and estrogens.

The amount of the compound of the invention administered per dose or the total amount administered per day may be predetermined or it may be determined on an individual patient basis by taking into consideration numerous factors, including the nature and severity of the patient's condition, the condition being treated, the age, weight, and general health of the patient, the tolerance of the patient to the active agent, the route of administration, pharmacological considerations such as the activity, efficacy, pharmacokinetics and toxicology profiles of the compound and any secondary agents being administered, and the like. Treatment of a patient suffering from a disease or medical condition (such as hypertension) can begin with a predetermined dosage or a dosage determined by the treating physician, and will continue for a period of time necessary to prevent, ameliorate, suppress, or alleviate the symptoms of the disease or medical condition. Patients undergoing such treatment will typically be monitored on a routine basis to determine the effectiveness of therapy. For example, in treating hypertension, blood pressure measurements may be used to determine the effectiveness of treatment. Similar indicators for other diseases and conditions described herein, are well known and are readily available to the treating physician. Continuous monitoring by the physician will insure that the optimal amount of the compound of the invention will be administered at any given time, as well as facilitating the determination of the duration of treatment. This is of particular value when secondary agents are also being administered, as their selection, dosage, and duration of therapy may also require adjustment. In this way, the treatment regimen and dosing schedule can be adjusted over the course of therapy so that the lowest amount of active agent that exhibits the desired effectiveness is administered and, further, that administration is continued only so long as is necessary to successfully treat the disease or medical condition.

Since compounds of the invention possess AT₁ receptor antagonist activity and/or NEP enzyme inhibition activity, such compounds are also useful as research tools for investigating or studying biological systems or samples having AT₁ receptors or a NEP enzyme, for example to study diseases where the AT₁ receptor or NEP enzyme plays a role. Any suitable biological system or sample having AT₁ receptors and/or a NEP enzyme may be employed in such studies which may be conducted either in vitro or in vivo. Representative biological systems or samples suitable for such studies include, but are not limited to, cells, cellular extracts, plasma membranes, tissue samples, isolated organs, mammals (such as mice, rats, guinea pigs, rabbits, dogs, pigs, humans, and so forth), and the like, with mammals being of particular interest. In one particular embodiment of the invention an AT₁ receptor in a mammal is antagonized by administering an AT₁-antagonizing amount of a compound of the invention. In another particular embodiment, NEP enzyme activity in a mammal is inhibited by administering a NEP-inhibiting amount of a compound of the invention. Compounds of the invention can also be used as research tools by conducting biological assays using such compounds.

When used as a research tool, a biological system or sample comprising an AT₁ receptor and/or a NEP enzyme is typically contacted with an AT₁ receptor-antagonizing or NEP enzyme-inhibiting amount of a compound of the invention. After the biological system or sample is exposed to the compound, the effects of antagonizing the AT₁ receptor and/or inhibiting the NEP enzyme are determined using conventional procedures and equipment, such as by measuring receptor binding in a binding assay or measuring ligand-mediated changes in a functional assay. Exposure encompasses contacting cells or tissue with the compound, administering the compound to a mammal, for example by i.p., i.v. or s.c. administration, and so forth. This determining step can involve measuring a response (a quantitative analysis) or can involve making an observation (a qualitative analysis). Measuring a response involves, for example, determining the effects of the compound on the biological system or sample using conventional procedures and equipment, such as radioligand binding assays and measuring ligand-mediated changes in functional assays. The assay results can be used to determine the activity level as well as the amount of compound necessary to achieve the desired result, that is, an AT₁ receptor-antagonizing and/or a NEP enzyme-inhibiting amount. Typically, the determining step will involve determining the AT₁ receptor ligand-mediated effects and/or determining the effects of inhibiting the NEP enzyme.

Additionally, compounds of the invention can be used as research tools for evaluating other chemical compounds, and thus are also useful in screening assays to discover, for example, new compounds having AT₁ receptor-antagonizing activity and/or NEP-inhibiting activity. In this manner, a compound of the invention is used as a standard in an assay to allow comparison of the results obtained with a test compound and with compounds of the invention to identify those test compounds that have about equal or superior activity, if any. For example, K_(i) data (as determined, for example, by a binding assay) for a test compound or a group of test compounds is compared to the K_(i) data for a compound of the invention to identify those test compounds that have the desired properties, for example, test compounds having a K_(i) value about equal or superior to a compound of the invention, if any. This aspect of the invention includes, as separate embodiments, both the generation of comparison data (using the appropriate assays) and the analysis of test data to identify test compounds of interest. Thus, a test compound can be evaluated in a biological assay, by a method comprising the steps of: (a) conducting a biological assay with a test compound to provide a first assay value; (b) conducting the biological assay with a compound of the invention to provide a second assay value; wherein step (a) is conducted either before, after or concurrently with step (b); and (c) comparing the first assay value from step (a) with the second assay value from step (b). Exemplary biological assays include an AT₁ receptor binding assay and a NEP enzyme inhibition assay.

Pharmaceutical Compositions and Formulations

Compounds of the invention are typically administered to a patient in the form of a pharmaceutical composition or formulation. Such pharmaceutical compositions may be administered to the patient by any acceptable route of administration including, but not limited to, oral, rectal, vaginal, nasal, inhaled, topical (including transdermal), ocular, and parenteral modes of administration. Further, the compounds of the invention may be administered, for example orally, in multiple doses per day (for example, two, three, or four times daily), in a single daily dose or a single weekly dose. It will be understood that any form of the compounds of the invention, (that is, free base, free acid, pharmaceutically acceptable salt, solvate, etc.) that is suitable for the particular mode of administration can be used in the pharmaceutical compositions discussed herein.

Accordingly, in one embodiment, the invention relates to a pharmaceutical composition comprising a pharmaceutically acceptable carrier and a compound of the invention. The compositions may contain other therapeutic and/or formulating agents if desired. When discussing compositions, the “compound of the invention” may also be referred to herein as the “active agent,” to distinguish it from other components of the formulation, such as the carrier. Thus, it is understood that the term “active agent” includes compounds of formula I as well as pharmaceutically acceptable salts, solvates and prodrugs of that compound.

The pharmaceutical compositions of the invention typically contain a therapeutically effective amount of a compound of the invention. Those skilled in the art will recognize, however, that a pharmaceutical composition may contain more than a therapeutically effective amount, such as in bulk compositions, or less than a therapeutically effective amount, that is, individual unit doses designed for multiple administration to achieve a therapeutically effective amount. Typically, the composition will contain from about 0.01-95 wt % of active agent, including, from about 0.01-30 wt %, such as from about 0.01-10 wt %, with the actual amount depending upon the formulation itself, the route of administration, the frequency of dosing, and so forth. In one embodiment, a composition suitable for an oral dosage form, for example, may contain about 5-70 wt %, or from about 10-60 wt % of active agent.

Any conventional carrier or excipient may be used in the pharmaceutical compositions of the invention. The choice of a particular carrier or excipient, or combinations of carriers or excipients, will depend on the mode of administration being used to treat a particular patient or type of medical condition or disease state. In this regard, the preparation of a suitable composition for a particular mode of administration is well within the scope of those skilled in the pharmaceutical arts. Additionally, carriers or excipients used in such compositions are commercially available. By way of further illustration, conventional formulation techniques are described in Remington: The Science and Practice of Pharmacy, 20^(th) Edition, Lippincott Williams & White, Baltimore, Md. (2000); and H. C. Ansel et al., Pharmaceutical Dosage Forms and Drug Delivery Systems, 7^(th) Edition, Lippincott Williams & White, Baltimore, Md. (1999).

Representative examples of materials which can serve as pharmaceutically acceptable carriers include, but are not limited to, the following: sugars, such as lactose, glucose and sucrose; starches, such as corn starch and potato starch; cellulose, such as microcrystalline cellulose, and its derivatives, such as sodium carboxymethyl cellulose, ethyl cellulose and cellulose acetate; powdered tragacanth; malt; gelatin; talc; excipients, such as cocoa butter and suppository waxes; oils, such as peanut oil, cottonseed oil, safflower oil, sesame oil, olive oil, corn oil and soybean oil; glycols, such as propylene glycol; polyols, such as glycerin, sorbitol, mannitol and polyethylene glycol; esters, such as ethyl oleate and ethyl laurate; agar; buffering agents, such as magnesium hydroxide and aluminum hydroxide; alginic acid; pyrogen-free water; isotonic saline; Ringer's solution; ethyl alcohol; phosphate buffer solutions; compressed propellant gases, such as chlorofluorocarbons and hydrofluorocarbons; and other non-toxic compatible substances employed in pharmaceutical compositions.

Pharmaceutical compositions are typically prepared by thoroughly and intimately mixing or blending the active agent with a pharmaceutically acceptable carrier and one or more optional ingredients. The resulting uniformly blended mixture may then be shaped or loaded into tablets, capsules, pills, canisters, cartridges, dispensers and the like using conventional procedures and equipment.

In formulations where the compound of the invention contains a thiol group, additional consideration may be given to minimize or eliminate oxidation of the thiol to form a disulfide. In solid formulations, this may be accomplished by reducing the drying time, decreasing the moisture content of the formulation, and including materials such as ascorbic acid, sodium ascorbate, sodium sulfite and sodium bisulfate, as well as materials such as a mixture of lactose and microcrystalline cellulose. In liquid formulations, stability of the thiol may be improved by the addition of amino acids, antioxidants, or a combination of disodium edetate and ascorbic acid.

In one embodiment, the pharmaceutical compositions are suitable for oral administration. Suitable compositions for oral administration may be in the form of capsules, tablets, pills, lozenges, cachets, dragees, powders, granules; solutions or suspensions in an aqueous or non-aqueous liquid; oil-in-water or water-in-oil liquid emulsions; elixirs or syrups; and the like; each containing a predetermined amount of the active agent.

When intended for oral administration in a solid dosage form (capsules, tablets, pills and the like), the composition will typically comprise the active agent and one or more pharmaceutically acceptable carriers, such as sodium citrate or dicalcium phosphate. Solid dosage forms may also comprise: fillers or extenders, such as starches, microcrystalline cellulose, lactose, sucrose, glucose, mannitol, and/or silicic acid; binders, such as carboxymethylcellulose, alginates, gelatin, polyvinyl pyrrolidone, sucrose and/or acacia; humectants, such as glycerol; disintegrating agents, such as agar-agar, calcium carbonate, potato or tapioca starch, alginic acid, certain silicates, and/or sodium carbonate; solution retarding agents, such as paraffin; absorption accelerators, such as quaternary ammonium compounds; wetting agents, such as cetyl alcohol and/or glycerol monostearate; absorbents, such as kaolin and/or bentonite clay; lubricants, such as talc, calcium stearate, magnesium stearate, solid polyethylene glycols, sodium lauryl sulfate, and/or mixtures thereof; coloring agents; and buffering agents.

Release agents, wetting agents, coating agents, sweetening, flavoring and perfuming agents, preservatives and antioxidants may also be present in the pharmaceutical compositions. Exemplary coating agents for tablets, capsules, pills and like, include those used for enteric coatings, such as cellulose acetate phthalate, polyvinyl acetate phthalate, hydroxypropyl methylcellulose phthalate, methacrylic acid-methacrylic acid ester copolymers, cellulose acetate trimellitate, carboxymethyl ethyl cellulose, hydroxypropyl methyl cellulose acetate succinate, and the like. Examples of pharmaceutically acceptable antioxidants include: water-soluble antioxidants, such as ascorbic acid, cysteine hydrochloride, sodium bisulfate, sodium metabisulfate sodium sulfite and the like; oil-soluble antioxidants, such as ascorbyl palmitate, butylated hydroxyanisole, butylated hydroxytoluene, lecithin, propyl gallate, alpha-tocopherol, and the like; and metal-chelating agents, such as citric acid, ethylenediamine tetraacetic acid, sorbitol, tartaric acid, phosphoric acid, and the like.

Compositions may also be formulated to provide slow or controlled release of the active agent using, by way of example, hydroxypropyl methyl cellulose in varying proportions or other polymer matrices, liposomes and/or microspheres. In addition, the pharmaceutical compositions of the invention may contain opacifying agents and may be formulated so that they release the active agent only, or preferentially, in a certain portion of the gastrointestinal tract, optionally, in a delayed manner. Examples of embedding compositions which can be used include polymeric substances and waxes. The active agent can also be in micro-encapsulated form, optionally with one or more of the above-described excipients.

Suitable liquid dosage forms for oral administration include, by way of illustration, pharmaceutically acceptable emulsions, microemulsions, solutions, suspensions, syrups and elixirs. Liquid dosage forms typically comprise the active agent and an inert diluent, such as, for example, water or other solvents, solubilizing agents and emulsifiers, such as ethyl alcohol, isopropyl alcohol, ethyl carbonate, ethyl acetate, benzyl alcohol, benzyl benzoate, propylene glycol, 1,3-butylene glycol, oils (for example, cottonseed, groundnut, corn, germ, olive, castor and sesame oils), glycerol, tetrahydrofuryl alcohol, polyethylene glycols and fatty acid esters of sorbitan, and mixtures thereof. Suspensions may contain suspending agents such as, for example, ethoxylated isostearyl alcohols, polyoxyethylene sorbitol and sorbitan esters, microcrystalline cellulose, aluminium metahydroxide, bentonite, agar-agar and tragacanth, and mixtures thereof.

When intended for oral administration, the pharmaceutical compositions of the invention may be packaged in a unit dosage form. The term “unit dosage form” refers to a physically discrete unit suitable for dosing a patient, that is, each unit containing a predetermined quantity of the active agent calculated to produce the desired therapeutic effect either alone or in combination with one or more additional units. For example, such unit dosage forms may be capsules, tablets, pills, and the like.

In another embodiment, the compositions of the invention are suitable for inhaled administration, and will typically be in the form of an aerosol or a powder. Such compositions are generally administered using well-known delivery devices, such as a nebulizer, dry powder, or metered-dose inhaler. Nebulizer devices produce a stream of high velocity air that causes the composition to spray as a mist that is carried into a patient's respiratory tract. An exemplary nebulizer formulation comprises the active agent dissolved in a carrier to form a solution, or micronized and combined with a carrier to form a suspension of micronized particles of respirable size. Dry powder inhalers administer the active agent as a free-flowing powder that is dispersed in a patient's air-stream during inspiration. An exemplary dry powder formulation comprises the active agent dry-blended with an excipient such as lactose, starch, mannitol, dextrose, polylactic acid, polylactide-co-glycolide, and combinations thereof. Metered-dose inhalers discharge a measured amount of the active agent using compressed propellant gas. An exemplary metered-dose formulation comprises a solution or suspension of the active agent in a liquefied propellant, such as a chlorofluorocarbon or hydrofluoroalkane. Optional components of such formulations include co-solvents, such as ethanol or pentane, and surfactants, such as sorbitan trioleate, oleic acid, lecithin, glycerin, and sodium lauryl sulfate. Such compositions are typically prepared by adding chilled or pressurized hydrofluoroalkane to a suitable container containing the active agent, ethanol (if present) and the surfactant (if present). To prepare a suspension, the active agent is micronized and then combined with the propellant. Alternatively, a suspension formulation can be prepared by spray drying a coating of surfactant on micronized particles of the active agent. The formulation is then loaded into an aerosol canister, which forms a portion of the inhaler.

Compounds of the invention can also be administered parenterally (for example, by subcutaneous, intravenous, intramuscular, or intraperitoneal injection). For such administration, the active agent is provided in a sterile solution, suspension, or emulsion. Exemplary solvents for preparing such formulations include water, saline, low molecular weight alcohols such as propylene glycol, polyethylene glycol, oils, gelatin, fatty acid esters such as ethyl oleate, and the like. Parenteral formulations may also contain one or more anti-oxidants, solubilizers, stabilizers, preservatives, wetting agents, emulsifiers, and dispersing agents. Surfactants, additional stabilizing agents or pH-adjusting agents (acids, bases or buffers) and anti-oxidants are particularly useful to provide stability to the formulation, for example, to minimize or avoid hydrolysis of ester and amide linkages, or dimerization of thiols that may be present in the compound. These formulations may be rendered sterile by use of a sterile injectable medium, a sterilizing agent, filtration, irradiation, or heat. In one particular embodiment, the parenteral formulation comprises an aqueous cyclodextrin solution as the pharmaceutically acceptable carrier. Suitable cyclodextrins include cyclic molecules containing six or more α-D-glucopyranose units linked at the 1,4 positions by a linkages as in amylase, β-cyclodextrin or cycloheptaamylose. Exemplary cyclodextrins include cyclodextrin derivatives such as hydroxypropyl and sulfobutyl ether cyclodextrins such as hydroxypropyl-β-cyclodextrin and sulfobutyl ether β-cyclodextrin. Exemplary buffers for such formulations include carboxylic acid-based buffers such as citrate, lactate and maleate buffer solutions.

Compounds of the invention can also be administered transdermally using known transdermal delivery systems and excipients. For example, the compound can be admixed with permeation enhancers, such as propylene glycol, polyethylene glycol monolaurate, azacycloalkan-2-ones and the like, and incorporated into a patch or similar delivery system. Additional excipients including gelling agents, emulsifiers and buffers, may be used in such transdermal compositions if desired.

If desired, the compounds of the invention may be administered in combination with one or more other therapeutic agents. Thus, in one embodiment, pharmaceutical compositions of the invention contain other drugs that are co-administered with a compound of the invention. For example, the composition may further comprise one or more drugs (also referred to as “secondary agents(s)”) selected from the group of diuretics, β₁ adrenergic receptor blockers, calcium channel blockers, angiotensin-converting enzyme inhibitors, AT₁ receptor antagonists, neprilysin inhibitors, non-steroidal anti-inflammatory agents, prostaglandins, anti-lipid agents, anti-diabetic agents, anti-thrombotic agents, renin inhibitors, endothelin receptor antagonists, endothelin converting enzyme inhibitors, aldosterone antagonists, angiotensin-converting enzyme/neprilysin inhibitors, and combinations thereof. Such therapeutic agents are well known in the art, and specific examples are described herein. By combining a compound of the invention with a secondary agent, triple therapy can be achieved; AT₁ receptor antagonist activity, NEP inhibition activity, and activity associated with the secondary agent (for example, β₁ adrenergic receptor blocker) can be achieved using only two active components. Since compositions containing two active components are typically easier to formulate than compositions containing three active components, such two-component compositions provide a significant advantage over compositions containing three active components. Accordingly, in yet another aspect of the invention, a pharmaceutical composition comprises a compound of the invention, a second active agent, and a pharmaceutically acceptable carrier. Third, fourth etc. active agents may also be included in the composition. In combination therapy, the amount of compound of the invention that is administered, as well as the amount of secondary agents, may be less than the amount typically administered in monotherapy.

Compounds of the invention may be physically mixed with the second active agent to form a composition containing both agents; or each agent may be present in separate and distinct compositions which are administered to the patient simultaneously or at separate times. For example, a compound of the invention can be combined with a second active agent using conventional procedures and equipment to form a combination of active agents comprising a compound of the invention and a second active agent. Additionally, the active agents may be combined with a pharmaceutically acceptable carrier to form a pharmaceutical composition comprising a compound of the invention, a second active agent and a pharmaceutically acceptable carrier. In this embodiment, the components of the composition are typically mixed or blended to create a physical mixture. The physical mixture is then administered in a therapeutically effective amount using any of the routes described herein.

Alternatively, the active agents may remain separate and distinct before administration to the patient. In this embodiment, the agents are not physically mixed together before administration but are administered simultaneously or at separate times as separate compositions. Such compositions can be packaged separately or may be packaged together in a kit. When administered at separate times, the secondary agent will typically be administered less than 24 hours after administration of the compound of the invention, ranging anywhere from concurrent with administration of the compound of the invention to about 24 hours post-dose. This is also referred to as sequential administration. Thus, a compound of the invention can be orally administered simultaneously or sequentially with another active agent using two tablets, with one tablet for each active agent, where sequential may mean being administered immediately after administration of the compound of the invention or at some predetermined time later (for example, one hour later or three hours later). Alternatively, the combination may be administered by different routes of administration, that is, one orally and the other by inhalation.

In one embodiment, the kit comprises a first dosage form comprising a compound of the invention and at least one additional dosage form comprising one or more of the secondary agents set forth herein, in quantities sufficient to carry out the methods of the invention. The first dosage form and the second (or third, etc,) dosage form together comprise a therapeutically effective amount of active agents for the treatment or prevention of a disease or medical condition in a patient.

Secondary agent(s), when included, are present in a therapeutically effective amount such that they are typically administered in an amount that produces a therapeutically beneficial effect when co-administered with a compound of the invention. The secondary agent can be in the form of a pharmaceutically acceptable salt, solvate, optically pure stereoisomer, and so forth. The secondary agent may also be in the form of a prodrug, for example, a compound having a carboxylic acid group that has been esterified. Thus, secondary agents listed herein are intended to include all such forms, and are commercially available or can be prepared using conventional procedures and reagents.

In one embodiment, a compound of the invention is administered in combination with a diuretic. Representative diuretics include, but are not limited to: carbonic anhydrase inhibitors such as acetazolamide and dichlorphenamide; loop diuretics, which include sulfonamide derivatives such as acetazolamide, ambuside, azosemide, bumetanide, butazolamide, chloraminophenamide, clofenamide, clopamide, clorexolone, disulfamide, ethoxolamide, furosemide, mefruside, methazolamide, piretanide, torsemide, tripamide, and xipamide, as well as non-sulfonamide diuretics such as ethacrynic acid and other phenoxyacetic acid compounds such as tienilic acid, indacrinone and quincarbate; osmotic diuretics such as mannitol; potassium-sparing diuretics, which include aldosterone antagonists such as spironolactone, and Na⁺ channel inhibitors such as amiloride and triamterene; thiazide and thiazide-like diuretics such as althiazide, bendroflumethiazide, benzylhydrochlorothiazide, benzthiazide, buthiazide, chlorthalidone, chlorothiazide, cyclopenthiazide, cyclothiazide, epithiazide, ethiazide, fenquizone, flumethiazide, hydrochlorothiazide, hydroflumethiazide, indapamide, methylclothiazide, meticrane, metolazone, paraflutizide, polythiazide, quinethazone, teclothiazide, and trichloromethiazide; and combinations thereof. In a particular embodiment, the diuretic is selected from amiloride, bumetanide, chlorothiazide, chlorthalidone, dichlorphenamide, ethacrynic acid, furosemide, hydrochlorothiazide, hydroflumethiazide, indapamide, methylclothiazide, metolazone, torsemide, triamterene, and combinations thereof. The diuretic will be administered in an amount sufficient to provide from about 5-50 mg per day, more typically 6-25 mg per day, with common dosages being 6.25 mg, 12.5 mg or 25 mg per day.

Compounds of the invention may also be administered in combination with a β₁ adrenergic receptor blocker. Representative β₁ adrenergic receptor blockers include, but are not limited to, acebutolol, alprenolol, amosulalol, arotinolol, atenolol, befunolol, betaxolol, bevantolol, bisoprolol, bopindolol, bucindolol, bucumolol, bufetolol, bufuralol, bunitrolol, bupranolol, bubridine, butofilolol, carazolol, carteolol, carvedilol, celiprolol, cetamolol, cloranolol, dilevalol, epanolol, esmolol, indenolol, labetolol, levobunolol, mepindolol, metipranolol, metoprolol such as metoprolol succinate and metoprolol tartrate, moprolol, nadolol, nadoxolol, nebivalol, nipradilol, oxprenolol, penbutolol, perbutolol, pindolol, practolol, pronethalol, propranolol, sotalol, sufinalol, talindol, tertatolol, tilisolol, timolol, toliprolol, xibenolol, and combinations thereof. In one particular embodiment, the β₁ adrenergic receptor blocker is selected from atenolol, bisoprolol, metoprolol, propranolol, sotalol, and combinations thereof.

In one embodiment, a compound of the invention is administered in combination with a calcium channel blocker. Representative calcium channel blockers include, but are not limited to, amlodipine, anipamil, aranipine, barnidipine, bencyclane, benidipine, bepridil, clentiazem, cilnidipine, cinnarizine, diltiazem, efonidipine, elgodipine, etafenone, felodipine, fendiline, flunarizine, gallopamil, isradipine, lacidipine, lercanidipine, lidoflazine, lomerizine, manidipine, mibefradil, nicardipine, nifedipine, niguldipine, niludipine, nilvadipine, nimodipine, nisoldipine, nitrendipine, nivaldipine, perhexyline, prenylamine, ryosidinc, scmotiadil, terodiline, tiapamil, verapamil, and combinations thereof. In a particular embodiment, the calcium channel blocker is selected from amlodipine, bepridil, diltiazem, felodipine, isradipine, lacidipine, nicardipine, nifedipine, niguldipine, niludipine, nimodipine, nisoldipine, ryosidine, verapamil, and combinations thereof.

Compounds of the invention can also be administered in combination with an angiotensin-converting enzyme (ACE) inhibitor. Representative ACE inhibitors include, but are not limited to, accupril, alacepril, benazepril, benazeprilat, captopril, ceranapril, cilazapril, delapril, enalapril, enalaprilat, fosinopril, fosinoprilat, imidapril, lisinopril, moexipril, monopril, moveltopril, pentopril, perindopril, quinapril, quinaprilat, ramipril, ramipril at, saralasin acetate, spirapril, temocapril, trandolapril, zofenopril, and combinations thereof. In a particular embodiment, the ACE inhibitor is selected from: benazepril, enalapril, lisinopril, ramipril, and combinations thereof.

In one embodiment, a compound of the invention is administered in combination with an AT₁ receptor antagonist, also known as angiotensin II type 1 receptor blockers (ARBs). Representative ARBs include, but are not limited to, abitesartan, benzyllosartan, candesartan, candesartan cilexetil, elisartan, embusartan, enoltasosartan, eprosartan, fonsartan, forasartan, glycyllosartan, irbesartan, isoteoline, losartan, medoximil, milfasartan, olmesartan, opomisartan, pratosartan, ripisartan, saprisartan, saralasin, sarmesin, tasosartan, telmisartan, valsartan, zolasartan, and combinations thereof. In a particular embodiment, the ARB is selected from candesartan, eprosartan, irbesartan, losartan, olmesartan, irbesartan, saprisartan, tasosartan, telmisartan, and combinations thereof. Exemplary salts include eprosartan mesylate, losartan potassium salt, and olmesartan medoxomil. Typically, the ARB will be administered in an amount sufficient to provide from about 4-600 mg per dose, with exemplary daily dosages ranging from 20-320 mg per day.

In another embodiment, a compound of the invention is administered in combination with a neprilysin (NEP) inhibitor. Representative NEP inhibitors include, but are not limited to: candoxatril; candoxatrilat; dexecadotril ((+)—N-[2(R)-(acetylthiomethyl)-3-phenylpropionyl]glycine benzyl ester); CGS-24128 (3-[3-(biphenyl-4-yl)-2-(phosphonomethylamino)propionamido]propionic acid); CGS-24592 ((S)-3-[3-(biphenyl-4-yl)-2-(phosphonomethylamino)propionamido]propionic acid); CGS-25155 (N-[9(R)-(acetylthiomethyl)-10-oxo-1-azacyclodecan-2(S)-ylcarbonyl]-4(R)-hydroxy-L-proline benzyl ester); 3-(1-carbamoylcyclohexyl)propionic acid derivatives described in WO 2006/027680 to Hepworth et al. (Pfizer Inc.); JMV-390-1 (2(R)-benzyl-3-(N-hydroxycarbamoyl)propionyl-L-isoleucyl-L-leucine); ecadotril; phosphoramidon; retrothiorphan; RU-42827 (2-(mercaptomethyl)-N-(4-pyridinyl)benzenepropionamide); RU-44004 (N-(4-morpholinyl)-3-phenyl-2-(sulfanylmethyl)propionamide); SCH-32615 ((S)—N—[N-(1-carboxy-2-phenylethyl)-L-phenylalanyl]-β-alanine) and its prodrug SCH-34826 ((S)—N—[N-[1-[[(2,2-dimethyl-1,3-dioxolan-4-yl)methoxy]carbonyl]-2-phenylethyl]-L-phenylalanyl]-(3-alanine); sialorphin; SCH-42495 (N-[2(S)-(acetylsulfanylmethyl)-3-(2-methylphenyl)propionyl]-L-methionine ethyl ester); spinorphin; SQ-28132 (N-[2-(mercaptomethyl)-1-oxo-3-phenylpropyl]leucine); SQ-28603 (N-[2-(mercaptomethyl)-1-oxo-3-phenylpropyl]-(3-alanine); SQ-29072 (7-[[2-(mercaptomethyl)-1-oxo-3-phenylpropyl]amino]heptanoic acid); thiorphan and its prodrug racecadotril; UK-69578 (cis-4-[[[1-[2-carboxy-3-(2-methoxyethoxy)propyl]cyclopentyl]carbonyl]amino]cyclohexanecarboxylic acid); UK-447,841 (2-{1-[3-(4-chlorophenyl)propylcarbamoyl]-cyclopentylmethyl}-4-methoxybutyric acid); UK-505,749 ((R)-2-methyl-3-{1-[3-(2-methylbenzothiazol-6-yl)propylcarbamoyl]cyclopentyl}propionic acid); 5-biphenyl-4-yl-4-(3-carboxypropionylamino)-2-methylpentanoic acid and 5-biphenyl-4-yl-4-(3-carboxypropionylamino)-2-methylpentanoic acid ethyl ester (WO 2007/056546); daglutril [(3S,2′R)-3-{1-[2′-(ethoxycarbonyl)-4′-phenylbutyl]-cyclopentan-1-carbonylamino}-2,3,4,5-tetrahydro-2-oxo-1H-1-benzazepine-1-acetic acid] described in WO 2007/106708 to Khder et al. (Novartis AG); and combinations thereof. In a particular embodiment, the NEP inhibitor is selected from candoxatril, candoxatrilat, CGS-24128, phosphoramidon, SCH-32615, SCH-34826, SQ-28603, thiorphan, and combinations thereof. The NEP inhibitor will be administered in an amount sufficient to provide from about 20-800 mg per day, with typical daily dosages ranging from 50-700 mg per day, more commonly 100-600 or 100-300 mg per day.

In yet another embodiment, a compound of the invention is administered in combination with a non-steroidal anti-inflammatory agent (NSAID). Representative NSAIDs include, but are not limited to: acemetacin, acetyl salicylic acid, alclofenac, alminoprofen, amfenac, amiprilose, amoxiprin, anirolac, apazone, azapropazone, benorilate, benoxaprofen, bezpiperylon, broperamole, bucloxic acid, carprofen, clidanac, diclofenac, diflunisal, diftalone, enolicam, etodolac, etoricoxib, fenbufen, fenclofenac, fenclozic acid, fenoprofen, fentiazac, feprazone, flufenamic acid, flufenisal, fluprofen, flurbiprofen, furofenac, ibufenac, ibuprofen, indomethacin, indoprofen, isoxcpac, isoxicam, ketoprofen, ketorolac, lofemizole, lornoxicam, meclofenamate, meclofenamic acid, mefenamic acid, meloxicam, mesalamine, miroprofen, mofebutazone, nabumetone, naproxen, niflumic acid, oxaprozin, oxpinac, oxyphenbutazone, phenylbutazone, piroxicam, pirprofen, pranoprofen, salsalate, sudoxicam, sulfasalazine, sulindac, suprofen, tenoxicam, tiopinac, tiaprofenic acid, tioxaprofen, tolfenamic acid, tolmetin, triflumidate, zidometacin, zomepirac, and combinations thereof. In a particular embodiment, the NSAID is selected from etodolac, flurbiprofen, ibuprofen, indomethacin, ketoprofen, ketorolac, meloxicam, naproxen, oxaprozin, piroxicam, and combinations thereof.

In yet another embodiment, a compound of the invention is administered in combination with an anti-lipid agent. Representative anti-lipid agents include, but are not limited to, statins such as atorvastatin, fluvastatin, lovastatin, pravastatin, rosuvastatin and simvastatin; cholesteryl ester transfer proteins (CETPs); and combinations thereof.

In yet another embodiment, a compound of the invention is administered in combination with an anti-diabetic agent. Representative anti-diabetic agents include injectable drugs as well as orally effective drugs, and combinations thereof. Examples of injectable drugs include, but are not limited to, insulin and insulin derivatives. Examples of orally effective drugs include, but are not limited to: biguanides such as metformin; glucagon antagonists; α-glucosidase inhibitors such as acarbose and miglitol; meglitinides such as repaglinide; oxadiazolidinediones; sulfonylureas such as chlorpropamide, glimepiride, glipizide, glyburide, and tolazamide; thiazolidinediones such as pioglitazone and rosiglitazone; and combinations thereof.

In one embodiment, a compound of the invention is administered in combination with an anti-thrombotic agent. Representative anti-thrombotic agents include, but are not limited to, aspirin, anti-platelet agents, heparin, and combinations thereof. Compounds of the invention may also be administered in combination with a renin inhibitor, examples of which include, but are not limited to, aliskiren, enalkiren, remikiren, and combinations thereof. In another embodiment, a compound of the invention is administered in combination with an endothelin receptor antagonist, representative examples of which include, but are not limited to, bosentan, darusentan, tezosentan, and combinations thereof. Compounds of the invention may also be administered in combination with an endothelin converting enzyme inhibitor, examples of which include, but are not limited to, phosphoramidon, CGS 26303, and combinations thereof. In yet another embodiment, a compound of the invention is administered in combination with an aldosterone antagonist, representative examples of which include, but are not limited to, eplerenone, spironolactone, and combinations thereof.

Combined therapeutic agents may also be helpful in further combination therapy with compounds of the invention. For example, a combination of the ACE inhibitor enalapril (in the maleate salt form) and the diuretic hydrochlorothiazide, which is sold under the mark Vaseretic®, or a combination of the calcium channel blocker amlodipine (in the besylate salt form) and the ARB olmesartan (in the medoxomil prodrug form), or a combination of a calcium channel blocker and a statin, all may also be used with the compounds of the invention. Dual-acting agents may also be helpful in combination therapy with compounds of the invention. For example, angiotensin-converting enzyme/neprilysin (ACE/NEP) inhibitors such as: AVE-0848 ((4S,7S,12bR)-7-[3-methyl-2(S)-sulfanylbutyramido]-6-oxo-1,2,3,4,6,7,8,12b-octahydropyrido[2,1-a][2]benzazepine-4-carboxylic acid); AVE-7688 (ilepatril) and its parent compound; BMS-182657 (2-[2-oxo-3(S)-[3-phenyl-2(S)-sulfanylpropionamido]-2,3,4,5-tetrahydro-1H-1-benzazepin-1-yl]acetic acid); CGS-26303 ([N-[2-(biphenyl-4-yl)-1(S)-(1H-tetrazol-5-yl)ethyl]amino]methylphosphonic acid); CGS-35601 (N-[1-[4-methyl-2(S)-sulfanylpentanamido]cyclopentylcarbonyl]-L-tryptophan); fasidotril; fasidotrilate; enalaprilat; ER-32935 ((3R,6S,9aR)-6-[3(S)-methyl-2(S)-sulfanylpentanamido]-5-oxoperhydrothiazolo[3,2-a]azepine-3-carboxylic acid); gempatrilat; MDL-101264 ((4S,7S,12bR)-7-[2(S)-(2-morpholinoacetylthio)-3-phenylpropionamido]-6-oxo-1,2,3,4,6,7,8,12b-octahydropyrido[2,1-a][2]benzazepine-4-carboxylic acid); MDL-101287 ([4S-[4α,7α(R*),12bβ]]-7-[2-(carboxymethyl)-3-phenylpropionamido]-6-oxo-1,2,3,4,6,7,8,12b-octahydropyrido[2,1-a][2]benzazepine-4-carboxylic acid); omapatrilat; RB-105 (N-[2(S)-(mercaptomethyl)-3(R)-phenylbutyl]-L-alanine); sampatrilat; SA-898 ((2R,4R)—N-[2-(2-hydroxyphenyl)-3-(3-mercaptopropionyl)thiazolidin-4-ylcarbonyl]-L-phenylalanine); Sch-50690 (N-[1(S)-carboxy-2-[N2-(methanesulfonyl)-L-lysylamino]ethyl]-L-valyl-L-tyrosine); and combinations thereof, may also be included. In one particular embodiment, the ACE/NEP inhibitor is selected from: AVE-7688, enalaprilat, fasidotril, fasidotrilate, omapatrilat, sampatrilat, and combinations thereof.

Other therapeutic agents such as α₂-adrenergic receptor agonists and vasopressin receptor antagonists may also be helpful in combination therapy. Exemplary α₂-adrenergic receptor agonists include clonidine, dexmedetomidine, and guanfacine. Exemplary vasopressin receptor antagonists include tolvaptan.

The following formulations illustrate representative pharmaceutical compositions of the invention.

Exemplary Hard Gelatin Capsules for Oral Administration

A compound of the invention (50 g), 440 g spray-dried lactose and 10 g magnesium stearate are thoroughly blended. The resulting composition is then loaded into hard gelatin capsules (500 mg of composition per capsule). Alternately, a compound of the invention (20 mg) is thoroughly blended with starch (89 mg), microcrystalline cellulose (89 mg) and magnesium stearate (2 mg). The mixture is then passed through a No. 45 mesh U.S. sieve and loaded into a hard gelatin capsule (200 mg of composition per capsule).

Exemplary Gelatin Capsule Formulation for Oral Administration

A compound of the invention (100 mg) is thoroughly blended with polyoxyethylene sorbitan monooleate (50 mg) and starch powder (250 mg). The mixture is then loaded into a gelatin capsule (300 mg of composition per capsule).

Alternately, a compound of the invention (40 mg) is thoroughly blended with microcrystalline cellulose (Avicel PH 103; 260 mg) and magnesium stearate (0.8 mg). The mixture is then loaded into a gelatin capsule (Size #1, White, Opaque) (300 mg of composition per capsule).

Exemplary Tablet Formulation for Oral Administration

A compound of the invention (10 mg), starch (45 mg) and microcrystalline cellulose (35 mg) are passed through a No. 20 mesh U.S. sieve and mixed thoroughly. The granules so produced are dried at 50-60° C. and passed through a No. 16 mesh U.S. sieve. A solution of polyvinylpyrrolidone (4 mg as a 10% solution in sterile water) is mixed with sodium carboxymethyl starch (4.5 mg), magnesium stearate (0.5 mg), and talc (1 mg), and this mixture is then passed through a No. 16 mesh U.S. sieve. The sodium carboxymethyl starch, magnesium stearate and talc are then added to the granules. After mixing, the mixture is compressed on a tablet machine to afford a tablet weighing 100 mg.

Alternately, a compound of the invention (250 mg) is thoroughly blended with microcrystalline cellulose (400 mg), silicon dioxide fumed (10 mg), and stearic acid (5 mg). The mixture is then compressed to form tablets (665 mg of composition per tablet).

Alternately, a compound of the invention (400 mg) is thoroughly blended with cornstarch (50 mg), croscarmellose sodium (25 mg), lactose (120 mg), and magnesium stearate (5 mg). The mixture is then compressed to form a single-scored tablet (600 mg of composition per tablet).

Alternately, a compound of the invention (100 mg) is thoroughly blended with cornstarch (100 mg) with an aqueous solution of gelatin (20 mg). The mixture is dried and ground to a fine powder. Microcrystalline cellulose (50 mg) and magnesium stearate (5 mg) are then admixed with the gelatin formulation, granulated and the resulting mixture compressed to form tablets (100 mg of the compound of the invention per tablet).

Exemplary Suspension Formulation for Oral Administration

The following ingredients are mixed to form a suspension containing 100 mg of the compound of the invention per 10 mL of suspension:

Ingredients Amount Compound of the invention 1.0 g Fumaric acid 0.5 g Sodium chloride 2.0 g Methyl paraben 0.15 g Propyl paraben 0.05 g Granulated sugar 25.5 g Sorbitol (70% solution) 12.85 g Veegum ® K (magnesium aluminum silicate) 1.0 g Flavoring 0.035 mL Colorings 0.5 mg Distilled water q.s. to 100 mL

Exemplary Liquid Formulation for Oral Administration

A suitable liquid formulation is one with a carboxylic acid-based buffer such as citrate, lactate and maleate buffer solutions. For example, a compound of the invention (which may be pre-mixed with DMSO) is blended with a 100 mM ammonium citrate buffer and the pH adjusted to pH 5, or is blended with a 100 mM citric acid solution and the pH adjusted to pH 2. Such solutions may also include a solubilizing excipient such as a cyclodextrin, for example the solution may include 10 wt % hydroxypropyl-β-cyclodextrin.

Other suitable formulations include a 5% NaHCO₃ solution, with or without cyclodextrin.

Exemplary Injectable Formulation for Administration by Injection

A compound of the invention (0.2 g) is blended with 0.4 M sodium acetate buffer solution (2.0 mL). The pH of the resulting solution is adjusted to pH 4 using 0.5 N aqueous hydrochloric acid or 0.5 N aqueous sodium hydroxide, as necessary, and then sufficient water for injection is added to provide a total volume of 20 mL. The mixture is then filtered through a sterile filter (0.22 micron) to provide a sterile solution suitable for administration by injection.

Exemplary Compositions for Administration by Inhalation

A compound of the invention (0.2 mg) is micronized and then blended with lactose (25 mg). This blended mixture is then loaded into a gelatin inhalation cartridge. The contents of the cartridge are administered using a dry powder inhaler, for example.

Alternately, a micronized compound of the invention (10 g) is dispersed in a solution prepared by dissolving lecithin (0.2 g) in demineralized water (200 mL). The resulting suspension is spray dried and then micronized to form a micronized composition comprising particles having a mean diameter less than about 1.5 μm. The micronized composition is then loaded into metered-dose inhaler cartridges containing pressurized 1,1,1,2-tetrafluoroethane in an amount sufficient to provide about 10 μg to about 500 μg of the compound of the invention per dose when administered by the inhaler.

Alternately, a compound of the invention (25 mg) is dissolved in citrate buffered (pH 5) isotonic saline (125 mL). The mixture is stirred and sonicated until the compound is dissolved. The pH of the solution is checked and adjusted, if necessary, to pH 5 by slowly adding aqueous 1N sodium hydroxide. The solution is administered using a nebulizer device that provides about 10 μg to about 500 μg is of the compound of the invention per dose.

EXAMPLES

The following Preparations and Examples are provided to illustrate specific embodiments of the invention. These specific embodiments, however, are not intended to limit the scope of the invention in any way unless specifically indicated.

The following abbreviations have the following meanings unless otherwise indicated and any other abbreviations used herein and not defined have their standard, generally accepted meaning:

-   -   ACE angiotensin converting enzyme     -   AcOH acetic acid     -   APP aminopeptidase P     -   AT₁ angiotensin II type 1 (receptor)     -   AT₂ angiotensin II type 2 (receptor)     -   BSA bovine serum albumin     -   DCM dichloromethane or methylene chloride     -   DIPEA N,N-diisopropylethylamine     -   DMF N,N-dimethylformamide     -   DMSO dimethyl sulfoxide     -   Dnp 2,4-dinitrophenyl     -   DOCA deoxycorticosterone acetate     -   EDC N-(3-dimethylaminopropyl)-N′-ethylcarbodiimide     -   EDTA ethylenediaminetetraacetic acid     -   EtOAc ethyl acetate     -   EtOH ethanol     -   HATU N,N,N′,N′-tetramethyl-O-(7-azabenzotriazol-1-yl)uronium         hexafluorophosphate     -   HOBt 1-hydroxybenzotriazole     -   Mca (7-methoxycoumarin-4-yl)acyl     -   MeCN acetonitrile     -   MeOH methanol     -   NBS N-bromosuccinimide     -   NEP neprilysin (EC 3.4.24.11)     -   PBS phosphate buffered saline     -   SHR spontaneously hypertensive rat     -   TFA trifluoroacetic acid     -   THF tetrahydrofuran     -   Tris tris(hydroxymethyl)aminomethane     -   Tween-20 polyethylene glycol sorbitan monolaurate

Unless noted otherwise, all materials, such as reagents, starting materials and solvents, were purchased from commercial suppliers (such as Sigma-Aldrich, Fluka Riedel-de Haën, and the like) and were used without further purification.

Reactions were run under nitrogen atmosphere, unless noted otherwise. The progress of reactions were monitored by thin layer chromatography (TLC), analytical high performance liquid chromatography (anal. HPLC), and mass spectrometry, the details of which are given in specific examples. Solvents used in analytical HPLC were as follows: solvent A was 98% H₂O/2% MeCN/1.0 mL/L TFA; solvent B was 90% MeCN/10% H₂O/1.0 mL/L TFA.

Reactions were worked up as described specifically in each preparation or example; commonly reaction mixtures were purified by extraction and other purification methods such as temperature-, and solvent-dependent crystallization, and precipitation. In addition, reaction mixtures were routinely purified by preparative HPLC, typically using Microsorb C18 and Microsorb BDS column packings and conventional eluents. Characterization of reaction products was routinely carried out by mass and ¹H-NMR spectrometry. For NMR measurement, samples were dissolved in deuterated solvent (CD₃OD, CDCl₃, or DMSO-d₆), and ¹H-NMR spectra were acquired with a Varian Gemini 2000 instrument (400 MHz) under standard observation conditions. Mass spectrometric identification of compounds was typically conducted using an electrospray ionization method (ESMS) with an Applied Biosystems (Foster City, Calif.) model API 150 EX instrument or an Agilent (Palo Alto, Calif.) model 1200 LC/MSD instrument.

Preparation 1 2-Butyl-1-(4-methoxycarbonylbenzyl)-1H-imidazole-4-carboxylic Acid

To a DMF (200 mL) solution of methyl 4-bromomethylbenzoate (10 g, 65.7 mmol) was added 2-butyl-3H-imidazole-4-carbaldehyde (15 g, 65.7 mmol) and potassium carbonate (11 g, 78.9 mmol). The mixture was stirred at room temperature overnight until the reaction was complete. EtOAc was added and the organic was washed with a 10% LiCl solution. The solvent was removed and the material was purified by silica gel chromatography to obtain a 3:1 mixture of regioisomers: the major isomer, 4-(2-butyl-4-formylimidazol-1-ylmethyl)benzoic acid methyl ester, and the minor isomer, 4-(2-butyl-5-formylimidazol-1-ylmethyl)benzoic acid methyl ester (˜20 g).

Major isomer: Anal. HPLC: retention time=2.52 min: gradient conditions 10% solvent B/90% solvent A to 70% solvent B/30% solvent A over 6 min (solvent A=98% H₂O/2% MeCN/1.0 mL/L TFA; solvent B=90% MeCN/10% H₂O/1.0 mL/L TFA). (m/z): [M+H]⁺ calcd for C₁₇H₂₀N₂O₃, 301.2. found 301.5.

Minor isomer: Anal. HPLC: retention time=2.34 min: gradient conditions 10% solvent B/90% solvent A to 70% solvent B/30% solvent A over 6 min (solvent A=98% water/2% MeCN/1.0 mL/L TFA; solvent B=90% MeCN/10% H₂O/1.0 mL/L TFA) (m/z): [M+H]⁺ calcd for C₁₇H₂₀N₂O₃, 301.2. found 301.3.

To the regioisomer mixture (19.7 g, 65.7 mmol) in n-butanol (700 mL), was added 2-methyl-2-butene (49 mL, 1.2 mol) as a 2N THF solution. A 900 mL aqueous solution of sodium chlorite (95 g, 1.2 mol) and sodium dihydrogen phosphate (95 g, 788 mmol) was added, and the resulting mixture was stirred at room temperature overnight until the reaction was complete. EtOAc was added and the organic was washed with a saturated sodium sulfite solution until no peroxides were detected in the organic layer. The solvent was removed and the material was purified by silica gel chromatography (hexanes/EtOAc) before separating 5.0 g of the mixture of isomers using reverse phase HPLC (1.2 g pure title compound confirmed by NMR).

Major isomer, title compound: Anal. HPLC: retention time=2.45 min: gradient conditions 10% solvent B/90% solvent A to 70% solvent B/30% solvent A over 6 min (solvent A=98% H₂O/2% MeCN/1.0 mL/L TFA; solvent B=90% MeCN/10% H₂O/1.0 mL/L TFA) (m/z): [M+H]⁺ calcd for C₁₇H₂₀N₂O₄317.2. found 317.0. ¹H NMR (D6-DMSO) 8.13 (1H, s), 7.99 (2H, d), 7.38 (2H, d), 5.46 (2H, s), 2.73 (2H, t), 1.45 (2H, m), 1.24 (2H, m), 0.82 (3H, t).

Example 1 4-[4-((R)-1-Benzyl-2-hydroxycarbamoylethylcarbamoyl)-2-butylimidazol-1-ylmethyl]benzoic Acid Methyl Ester (1a; R^(1a)═—CH₃; R^(5b)═—OC(O)C(CH₃)₃) and 4-[4-((R)-1-benzyl-2-hydroxycarbamoylethylcarbamoyl)-2-butyl-imidazol-1-ylmethyl]benzoic Acid (1b; R^(1a)═H; R^(5b)═—OH)

To a DMF (25 mL) solution of 2-butyl-1-(4-methoxycarbonylbenzyl)-1H-imidazole-4-carboxylic acid (1.1 g, 3.5 mmol), was added HOBt (470 mg, 3.5 mmol), followed by (R)-3-amino-N-(2,2-dimethylpropionyloxy)-4-phenylbutyramide-C₂HF₃O₂ (1.5 g, 3.7 mmol). DIPEA (1.2 mL, 7.0 mmol) was added neat followed by EDC (hydrochloride; 0.7 g, 3.7 mmol). The mixture was stirred at room temperature overnight until the reaction was complete. The solvent was removed and the material was purified by silica gel chromatography (hexanes/EtOAc) to yield intermediate (1a).

Anal. HPLC: retention time=4.0 min: gradient conditions 10% solvent B/90% solvent A to 70% solvent B/30% solvent A over 6 min (solvent A=98% H₂O/2% MeCN/1.0 mL/L TFA; solvent B=90% MeCN/10% H₂O/1.0 mL/L TFA) (m/z): [M+H]⁺ calcd for C₃₂H₄₀N₄O₆, 577.3. found 577.8.

To a THF (4 mL) solution of intermediate (1a) (0.5 g, 875 μmol) was added a solution of 1M NaOH (4.3 mL, 4.3 mmol). The mixture was stirred at room temperature overnight until the reaction was complete. EtOAc was added and the aqueous phase acidified to pH 4 with 1N HCl. The solution was concentrated and the material was purified by purified by reverse phase chromatography on a gradient of 10-55% (over 90 min); flow rate 15 mL/min; detection at 280 nm. Pure fractions were combined and lyophilized in 50/50 H₂O/MeCN to give the title compound (1b) as a white solid TFA salt (209 mg).

Anal. HPLC: retention time=2.7 min: gradient conditions 10% solvent B/90% solvent A to 70% solvent B/30% solvent A over 6 min (solvent A=98% H₂O/2% MeCN/1.0 mL/L TFA; solvent B=90% MeCN/10% H₂O/1.0 mL/L TFA) (m/z): [M+H]⁺ calcd for C₂₆H₃₀N₄O₅, 479.2. found 479.3. ¹H NMR (D6-DMSO) 10.41 (1H, s), 7.91 (2H, d), 7.71 (1H, s), 7.28-7.11 (7H, m), 5.35 (2H, s), 4.41 (1H, m), 2.81-2.62 (4H, m), 2.17 (2H, m), 1.44 (2H, m), 1.20 (2H, m), 0.78 (3H, t).

Example 2

Following the procedures described in the examples above, and substituting the appropriate starting materials and reagents, compounds 2-1 to 2-16, having the following formula, were also prepared:

Ex. R R² X R⁵ R⁶ 1 — H —C(O)NH— —CH₂C(O)NH(OH) benzyl 2 — H —CH₂NHC(O)— —C(O)NH(OH) benzyl 3 — H —CH₂NHC(O)— —CH₂SH —CH₂CH(CH₃)₂ 4 2-Br H —CH₂NHC(O)— —CH₂SH —CH₂CH(CH₃)₂ 5 2-Br H —CH₂NHC(O)— —CH₂SH benzyl 6 2-Br H —CH₂NHC(O)— —C(O)NH(OH) —CH₂CH(CH₃)₂ 7 2-F H —CH₂NHC(O)— —CH₂SH —CH₂CH(CH₃)₂ 8 2-Br H —C(O)NH— —CH₂C(O)NH(OH) 2-bromobenzyl 9 2-Br H —C(O)NH— —CH₂C(O)NH(OH) 2-methylbenzyl 10 2-F H —CH₂NHC(O)— —CH₂SH —CH₂CH(CH₃)₂ 11 — H —C(O)NH— —CH₂SH benzyl 12 2-Br H —C(O)NH— —CH₂SH —CH₂CH(CH₃)₂ 13 2-Br H —C(O)NH— —CH₂SH benzyl 14 — H —C(O)NH— —CH₂SH —CH₂CH(CH₃)₂ 15 — Cl —(CH₂)₂NHC(O)— —CH₂SH —CH₂CH(CH₃)₂ 16 — Cl —(CH₂)₂NHC(O)— —CH₂SH benzyl

-   (2-1)     4-[4-((S)-1-benzyl-2-hydroxycarbamoylethylcarbamoyl)-2-butylimidazol-1-ylmethyl]benzoic     acid. MS m/z: [M+H]⁺ calcd for C₂₆H₃₀N₄O₅, 479.22. found 479.0. -   (2-2)     4-{2-butyl-4-[(2-hydroxycarbamoyl-3-phenylpropionylamino)methyl]-imidazol-1-ylmethyl}benzoic     acid. MS m/z: [M+H]⁺ calcd for C₂₆H₃₀N₄O₅, 479.22. found 479.2. -   (2-3)     4-{2-butyl-4-[(2-mercaptomethyl-4-methylpentanoylamino)methyl]-imidazol-1-ylmethyl}benzoic     acid. MS m/z: [M+H]⁺ calcd for C₂₃H₃₃N₃O₃S, 432.22. found 433.0. -   (2-4)     2-bromo-4-{2-butyl-4-[(2-mercaptomethyl-4-methylpentanoylamino)methyl]-imidazol-1-ylmethyl}benzoic     acid. MS m/z: [M+H]⁺ calcd for C₂₃H₃₂BrN₃O₃S, 510.13. found 511. -   (2-5)     4-{4-[(2-benzyl-3-mercaptopropionylamino)methyl]-2-butylimidazol-1-ylmethyl}-2-bromobenzoic     acid. MS m/z: [M+H]⁺ calcd for C₂₆H₃₀BrN₃O₃S, 544.12. found 545. -   (2-6)     2-bromo-4-{2-butyl-4-[(2-hydroxycarbamoyl-4-methylpentanoylamino)-methyl]-imidazol-1-ylmethyl}benzoic     acid. MS m/z: [M+H]⁺ calcd for C₂₃H₃₁BrN₄O₅, 523.15. found 524. -   (2-7)     4-{2-butyl-4-[((S)-2-mercaptomethyl-4-methylpentanoylamino)methyl]-imidazol-1-ylmethyl}-2-fluorobenzoic     acid. MS m/z: [M+H]⁺ calcd for C₂₃H₃₂FN₃O₃S, 450.22. found 450.2. -   (2-8)     2-bromo-4-{4-[(R)-1-(2-bromobenzyl)-2-hydroxycarbamoyl-ethylcarbamoyl]-2-butylimidazol-1-ylmethyl}benzoic     acid. MS m/z: [M+H]⁺ calcd for C₂₆H₂₈Br₂N₄O₅, 635.04. found 636.2 -   (2-9)     2-bromo-4-{2-butyl-4-[(R)-2-hydroxycarbamoyl-1-(2-methylbenzyl)ethylcarbamoyl]-imidazol-1-ylmethyl}benzoic     acid. MS m/z: [M+H]⁺ calcd for C₂₇H₃₁BrN₄O₅, 571.15. found 572.4. -   (2-10)     4-{2-butyl-4-[((R)-2-mercaptomethyl-4-methylpentanoylamino)methyl]-imidazol-1-ylmethyl}-2-fluorobenzoic     acid. MS m/z: [M+H]⁺ calcd for C₂₃H₃₂FN₃O₃S, 450.22. found 450.2. -   (2-11) 4-[4-((R)-1-benzyl-2-mercapto     ethylcarbamoyl)-2-butylimidazol-1-ylmethyl]benzoic acid. MS m/z:     [M+H]⁺ calcd for C₂₅H₂₉N₃O₃S, 452.19. found 452.2. -   (2-12) 4-[4-((R)-1-benzyl-2-mercaptoethylcarbamoyl)-2-butyl     imidazol-1-ylmethyl]-2-bromobenzoic acid. MS m/z: [M+H]⁺ calcd for     C₂₅H₂₈BrN₃O₃S, 530.10. found 530.4. -   (2-13)     2-bromo-4-[2-butyl-4-((R)-1-mercaptomethyl-3-methylbutylcarbamoyl)-imidazol-1-ylmethyl]benzoic     acid. MS m/z: [M+H]⁺ calcd for C₂₂H₃₀BrN₃O₃S, 496.12. found 496.4. -   (2-14)     4-[2-butyl-4-((R)-1-mercaptomethyl-3-methylbutylcarbamoyl)-imidazol-1-ylmethyl]benzoic     acid. MS m/z: [M+H]⁺ calcd for C₂₂H₃₁N₃O₃S, 418.21. found 418.4. -   (2-15)     4-{2-butyl-5-chloro-4-[2-(2-mercaptomethyl-4-methylpentanoylamino)ethyl]-imidazol-1-ylmethyl}benzoic     acid. MS m/z: [M+H]⁺ calcd for C₂₄H₃₄ClN₃O₃S, 480.20. found 480.0. -   (2-16)     4-{4-[2-(2-benzyl-3-mercaptopropionylamino)ethyl]-2-butyl-5-chloroimidazol-1-ylmethyl}benzoic     acid. MS m/z: [M+H]⁺ calcd for C₂₇H₃₂ClN₃O₃S, 514.19. found 514.6.

Example 3

Following the procedures described in the examples above, and substituting the appropriate starting materials and reagents, compounds 3-1 to 3-6, having the following formula, were also prepared:

Ex. R⁵ R⁶ 1 —CH₂C(O)NH(OH) benzyl 2 —CH₂C(O)NH(OH) 2-bromobenzyl 3 —CH₂C(O)NH(OH) benzyl 4 —CH₂COOH benzyl 5 —CH₂SH benzyl 6 —CH₂SH —CH₂CH(CH₃)₂

-   (3-1)     2-butyl-1-[4-(1H-tetrazol-5-yl)benzyl]-1H-imidazole-4-carboxylic     acid ((S)-1-hydroxycarbamoylmethyl-2-phenylethyl)amide. MS m/z:     [M+H]⁺ calcd for C₂₆H₃₀N₈O₃, 503.24. found 503.2. -   (3-2)     2-butyl-1-[4-(1H-tetrazol-5-yl)benzyl]-1H-imidazole-4-carboxylic     acid [(R)-2-(2-bromophenyl)-1-hydroxycarbamoylmethylethyl]amide. MS     m/z: [M+H]⁺ calcd for C₂₆H₂₉BrN₈O₃, 581.15. found 583.3. -   (3-3)     2-butyl-1-[4-(1H-tetrazol-5-yl)benzyl]-1H-imidazole-4-carboxylic     acid ((R)-1-hydroxycarbamoylmethyl-2-phenylethyl)amide. MS m/z:     [M+H]⁺ calcd for C₂₆H₃₀N₈O₃, 503.24. found 503.2. -   (3-4)     (R)-3-({2-butyl-1-[4-(1H-tetrazol-5-yl)benzyl]-1H-imidazole-4-carbonyl}amino)-4-phenylbutyric     acid. MS m/z: [M+H]⁺ calcd for C₂₆H₂₉N₇O₃, 488.23. found 488.3. -   (3-5)     2-butyl-1-[4-(2H-tetrazol-5-yl)benzyl]-1H-imidazole-4-carboxylic     acid ((R)-1-mercaptomethyl-2-phenylethyl)amide. MS m/z: [M+H]⁺ calcd     for C₂₅H₂₉N₇OS, 476.22. found 476.4. -   (3-6)     2-butyl-1-[4-(2H-tetrazol-5-yl)-benzyl]-1H-imidazole-4-carboxylic     acid ((R)-1-mercaptomethyl-3-methylbutyl)amide. MS m/z: [M+H]⁺ calcd     for C₂₂H₃₁N₇OS, 442.23. found 442.4.

Preparation 2 5-(4′-Bromomethylbiphenyl-2-yl)-1-trityl-1H-tetrazole

To a nitrogen-saturated suspension of N-triphenylmethyl-5-[4′-methylbiphenyl-2-yl]tetrazole (10 g, 20.9 mmol) in DCM was added NBS (3.7 g, 20.9 mmol) and a catalytic amount of benzoyl peroxide (60 mg, 0.2 mmol). The mixture was stirred at reflux for 15 hours. After cooling to room temperature, the precipitate was filtered and the organic solution was concentrated in vacuo. Purification by silica gel chromatography (EtOAc/hexane) gave the title compound as a white solid.

¹H-NMR (400 MHz, DMSO-d₆): δ (ppm) 4.61 (s, 2H), 6.80 (d, 6H), 7.01 (d, 2H), 7.24 (d, 2H), 7.28-7.35 (m, 9H), 7.43-7.45 (dd, 1H), 7.50-7.56 (td, 1H), 7.58-7.60 (td, 1H), 7.77-7.79 (dd, 1H).

Preparation 3 2-Butyl-1-[2′-(1-trityl-1H-tetrazol-5-yl)-biphenyl-4-ylmethyl]-1H-imidazole-4-carboxylic acid (produced as a regioisomer mixture with 2-butyl-3-[2′-(1-trityl-1H-tetrazol-5-yl)-biphenyl-4-ylmethyl]-3H-imidazole-4-carboxylic acid)

To a DMF (75 mL) solution of 5-(4′-bromomethylbiphenyl-2-yl)-1-trityl-1H-tetrazole (7.8 g, 14.1 mmol), was added 2-butyl-3H-imidazole-4-carbaldehyde (2.1 g, 14.1 mmol) and potassium carbonate (1.9 g, 14.1 mmol). The mixture was stirred at room temperature overnight until the reaction was complete. EtOAc (200 mL) was added and the organic was washed with 1M phosphoric acid (100 mL), 1×100 mL saturated sodium bicarbonate solution (100 mL) and saturated aqueous NaCl (2×100 mL). The solvent was removed and the material was purified by flash chromatography/silica gel chromatography (hexanes/EtOAc) to obtain a mixture of regioisomers: 2-butyl-1-[2′-(1-trityl-1H-tetrazol-5-yl)-biphenyl-4-ylmethyl]-1H-imidazole-4-carbaldehyde and 2-butyl-3-[2′-(1-trityl-1H-tetrazol-5-yl)-biphenyl-4-ylmethyl]-3H-imidazole-4-carbaldehyde (6 g).

Major/Minor isomer: Anal. HPLC: retention time=4.68 min: gradient conditions 10% solvent B/90% solvent A to 70% solvent B/30% solvent A over 6 min (solvent A=98% H₂O/2% MeCN/1.0 mL/L TFA; solvent B=90% MeCN/10% H₂O/1.0 mL/L TFA) (m/z): [M+H]⁺ calcd for C₄₁H₃₆N₆O, 629.3. found 629.6.

To the regioisomer mixture (5.0 g, 8.0 mmol) in 2-propanol (150 mL), was added 2-methyl-2-butene (31.8 mL, 63.6 mmol) as a 2M THF solution. A 75 mL aqueous solution of sodium chlorite (7.2 g, 79.6 mmol) and sodium dihydrogen phosphate (10.5 g, 87.5 mmol) was added, and the resulting mixture was stirred for 30 minutes at room temperature until the reaction was complete. EtOAc was added and the organic was washed with a saturated sodium sulfite solution until no peroxides were detected in the organic layer. The material was then washed with saturated aqueous NaCl (2×100 mL), and the organic layer was dried over MgSO₄ for 10 minutes, filtered and evacuated to dryness by rotory evaporation to give a mixture of isomers as a white solid (5.7 g).

Major isomer, 2-butyl-3-[2′-(1-trityl-1H-tetrazol-5-yl)-biphenyl-4-ylmethyl]-3H-imidazole-4-carboxylic acid: Anal. HPLC: retention time=4.48 min: gradient conditions 10% solvent B/90% solvent A to 70% solvent B/30% solvent A over 6 min (solvent A=98% H₂O/2% MeCN/1.0 mL/L TFA; solvent B=90% MeCN/10% H₂O/1.0 mL/L TFA) (m/z): [M+H]⁺ calcd for C₄₁H₃₆N₆O₂, 645.3. found 645.5.

Minor isomer, 2-Butyl-1-[2′-(1-trityl-1H-tetrazol-5-yl)biphenyl-4-ylmethyl]-1H-imidazole-4-carboxylic acid: Anal. HPLC: retention time=4.53 min: gradient conditions 10% solvent B/90% solvent A to 70% solvent B/30% solvent A over 6 min (solvent A=98% H₂O/2% MeCN/1.0 mL/L TFA; solvent B=90% MeCN/10% H₂O/1.0 mL/L TFA). (m/z): [M+H]⁺ calcd for C₄₁H₃₆N₆O₂, 645.3. found 645.5.

Example 4 2-Butyl-1-[2′-(1H-tetrazol-5-yl)biphenyl-4-ylmethyl]-1H-imidazole-4-carboxylic Acid ((R)-1-hydroxycarbamoylmethyl-2-phenylethyl)amide

HOBt (250 mg, 1.9 mmol) and EDC (hydrochloride; 360 mg, 1.9 mmol) were added to a regioisomer mixture of 2-butyl-1-[2′-(1-trityl-1H-tetrazol-5-yl)-biphenyl-4-ylmethyl]-1H-imidazole-4-carboxylic acid and 2-butyl-3-[2′-(1-trityl-1H-tetrazol-5-yl)-biphenyl-4-ylmethyl]-3H-imidazole-4-carboxylic acid) (600 mg, 0.9 mmol). The solids were dissolved in DMF (2.0 mL, 25.8 mmol), DIPEA (161 μL, 0.9 mmol) was added, and the mixture was stirred at room temperature for 60 minutes. (R)-3-Amino-4-phenylbutyric acid.HCl (41 μg, 1.9 mmol) was added, followed by the addition of DIPEA (161 μL, 0.924 mmol). The resulting mixture was stirred at room temperature for 30 minutes to yield a regioisomer mixture of intermediates (R)-3-({2-butyl-1-[2′-(1-trityl-1H-tetrazol-5-yl)biphenyl-4-ylmethyl]-1H-imidazole-4-carbonyl}amino)-4-phenylbutyric acid and (R)-3-({2-butyl-3-[2′-(1-trityl-1H-tetrazol-5-yl)-biphenyl-4-ylmethyl]-3H-imidazol e-4-carbonyl}amino)-4-phenylbutyric acid.

Anal. LCMS retention time=4.1 min: gradient conditions 25% solvent B/75% solvent A to 95% solvent B/5% solvent A over 6 min (solvent A=98% water/2% MeCN/1.0 mL/L TFA; solvent B=90% MeCN/10% H₂O/1.0 mL/L TFA) (m/z): [M+H]⁺ calcd for C₅₁H₄₇N₇O₃, 806.4. found 806.6.

In situ reaction: HOBt (250 mg, 1.9 mmol) was added to the regioisomer mixture of intermediates, followed by the addition of EDC (hydrochloride; 360 mg, 1.9 mmol). The resulting mixture was stirred for 30 minutes. Hydroxylamine hydrochloride (130 mg, 1.9 mmol) and DIPEA (161 μL, 0.9 mmol) were added, and the mixture was stirred at room temperature for an additional 30 minutes. Note that the trityl protecting group was removed when concentrated, but could also be removed by stirring with 4N HCl in dioxane over 2 hours. The mixture was concentrated and the resulting crude solid was purified by reverse phase HPLC (gradient of 20-45% over 90 min; flow rate 15 mL/min; detection at 280 nm). Pure fractions were combined and lyophilized in 50/50 H₂O/MeCN to give the title compound a white solid TFA salt (100 mg).

Anal. HPLC: retention time=3.4 min: gradient conditions 10% solvent B/90% solvent A to 70% solvent B/30% solvent A over 6 min (solvent A=98% H₂O/2% MeCN/1.0 mL/L TFA; solvent B=90% McCN/10% H₂O/1.0 mL/L TFA) (m/z): [M+H]⁺ calcd for C₃₂H₃₄N₈O₃, 579.3. found 579.4. ¹H NMR (D4-methanol) 7.60 (3H, m), 7.48 (2H, m), 7.07-7.18 (9H, m), 5.26 (2H, s), 4.51 (1H, m), 2.83 (4H, m), 2.30 (2H, m), 1.55 (2H, m), 1.28 (2H, m), 0.84 (3H, m).

Example 5

Following the procedures described in the examples above, and substituting the appropriate starting materials and reagents, compounds 5-1 to 5-21, having the following formula, were also prepared:

Ex. R R² X R⁵ R⁶ 1 — —COOH —CH₂NHC(O)— —SH benzyl 2 — —COOH —CH₂NHC(O)— —CH₂SH benzyl 3 — —COOH —CH₂NHC(O)— —C(O)NH(OH) —CH₂CH(CH₃)₂ 4 — —COOH —CH₂NHC(O)— —C(O)NH(OH) benzyl 5 — —COOH —CH₂NHC(O)— —C(O)NH(OH) —CH(CH₃)₂ 6 — H —C(O)NH— —CH₂C(O)NH(OH) benzyl 7 — H —C(O)NH— —CH₂C(O)NH(OH) benzyl 8 — H —CH₂NHC(O)— —C(O)NH(OH) —CH₂CH(CH₃)₂ 9 — H —CH₂NHC(O)— —C(O)NH(OH) benzyl 10 — H —CH₂NHC(O)— —CH₂SH —CH₂CH(CH₃)₂ 11 — H —CH₂NHC(O)— —CH₂SH benzyl 12 — H —CH₂NHC(O)— —CH₂SH cyclopentyl 13 — H —CH₂NHC(O)— —CH₂SH —(CH₂)₂CH(CH₃)₂ 14 — H —CH₂NHC(O)— —CH₂SH —CH(CH₃)CH₂CH₃ 15 — H —CH₂NHC(O)— —CH₂SH —CH₂-cyclopentyl 16 — H —CH₂NHC(O)— —CH₂SH —CH₂-cyclohexyl 17 — H —CH₂NHC(O)— —SH —CH₂C(CH₃)₃ 18 — H —CH₂NHC(O)— —SH —CH₂CH(CH₃)₂ 19 — H —CH₂NHC(O)— —SH —CH₂CH(CH₃)₂ 20 — H —CH₂NHC(O)— —CH₂SH —CH(CH₃)₂ 21 3′-F Br —CH₂NHC(O)— —CH₂SH benzyl

-   (5-1)     2-butyl-3-(2′-carboxybiphenyl-4-ylmethyl)-5-[((S)-2-mercapto-3-phenylpropionylamino)methyl]-3H-imidazole-4-carboxylic     acid. MS m/z: [M+H]⁺ calcd for C₃₂H₃₃N₃O₅S, 572.21. found 572.3. -   (5-2)     5-[(2-benzyl-3-mercaptopropionylamino)methyl]-2-butyl-3-(2′-carboxybiphenyl-4-ylmethyl)-3H-imidazole-4-carboxylic     acid. MS m/z: [M+H]⁺ calcd for C₃₃H₃₅N₃O₅S, 586.23. found 586.2. -   (5-3)     2-butyl-3-(2′-carboxybiphenyl-4-ylmethyl)-5-[(2-hydroxycarbamoyl-4-methylpentanoylamino)methyl]-3H-imidazole-4-carboxylic     acid. MS m/z: [M+H]⁺ calcd for C₃₀H₃₆N₄O₇, 565.26. found 565.3. -   (5-4)     2-butyl-3-(2′-carboxybiphenyl-4-ylmethyl)-5-[(2-hydroxycarbamoyl-3-phenylpropionylamino)methyl]-3H-imidazole-4-carboxylic     acid. MS m/z: [M+H]⁺ calcd for C₃₃H₃₄N₄O₇, 599.24. found 599.4. -   (5-5)     2-butyl-3-(2′-carboxybiphenyl-4-ylmethyl)-5-[(2-hydroxycarbamoyl-3-methylbutyrylamino)methyl]-3H-imidazole-4-carboxylic     acid. MS m/z/z: [M+H]⁺ calcd for C₂₉H₃₄N₄O₇, 551.24. found 551.4. -   (5-6)     4′-[2-butyl-4-((S)-1-hydroxycarbamoylmethyl-2-phenylethylcarbamoyl)-imidazol-1-ylmethyl]biphenyl-2-carboxylic     acid. MS m/z: [M+H]⁺ calcd for C₃₂H₃₄N₄O₅, 555.25. found 555.8. -   (5-7)     4′-[2-butyl-4-((R)-1-hydroxycarbamoylmethyl-2-phenylethylcarbamoyl)-imidazol-1-ylmethyl]biphenyl-2-carboxylic     acid. MS m/z: [M+H]⁺ calcd for C₃₂H₃₄N₄O₅, 555.25. found 555.3. -   (5-8)     4′-{2-butyl-4-[(2-hydroxycarbamoyl-4-methylpentanoylamino)methyl]-imidazol-1-ylmethyl}biphenyl-2-carboxylic     acid. MS m/z: [M+H]⁺ calcd for C₂₉H₃₆N₄O₅, 521.27. found 521.4. -   (5-9)     4′-{2-butyl-4-[(2-hydroxycarbamoyl-3-phenylpropionylamino)methyl]imidazol-1-ylmethyl}biphenyl-2-carboxylic     acid. MS m/z: [M+H]⁺ calcd for C₃₂H₃₄N₄O₅, 555.25. found 555.2. -   (5-10)     4′-{2-butyl-4-[(2-mercaptomethyl-4-methylpentanoylamino)methyl]imidazol-1-ylmethyl}biphenyl-2-carboxylic     acid. MS m/z: [M+H]⁺ calcd for C₂₉H₃₇N₃O₃S, 508.26. found 508.4. -   (5-11)     4′-{4-[(2-benzyl-3-mercaptopropionylamino)methyl]-2-butylimidazol-1-ylmethyl}biphenyl-2-carboxylic     acid. MS m/z: [M+H]⁺ calcd for C₃₂H₃₅N₃O₃S, 542.24. found 542.2. -   (5-12)     4′-{2-butyl-4-[(2-cyclopentyl-3-mercaptopropionylamino)methyl]-imidazol-1-ylmethyl}biphenyl-2-carboxylic     acid. MS m/z: [M+H]⁺ calcd for C₃₀H₃₇N₃O₃S, 520.26. found 520.2. -   (5-13) 4′-{2-butyl-4-[(2-mercapto     methyl-5-methylhexanoylamino)methyl]imidazol-1-ylmethyl}biphenyl-2-carboxylic     acid. MS m/z: [M+H]⁺ calcd for C₃₀H₃₉N₃O₃S, 522.27; found 522.2. -   (5-14)     4′-{2-butyl-4-[(2-mercaptomethyl-3-methylpentanoylamino)-methyl]-imidazol-1-ylmethyl}biphenyl-2-carboxylic     acid. MS m/z: [M+H]⁺ calcd for C₂₉H₃₇N₃O₃S, 508.26. found 508.2. -   (5-15)     4′-{2-butyl-4-[(2-cyclopentylmethyl-3-mercaptopropionylamino)methyl]-imidazol-1-ylmethyl}biphenyl-2-carboxylic     acid. MS m/z: [M+H]⁺ calcd for C₃₁H₃₉N₃O₃S, 534.27. found 534.2. -   (5-16)     4′-{2-butyl-4-[(2-cyclohexylmethyl-3-mercaptopropionylamino)methyl]-imidazol-1-ylmethyl}biphenyl-2-carboxylic     acid. MS m/z: [M+H]⁺ calcd for C₃₂H₄₁N₃O₃S, 548.29. found 548.2. -   (5-17)     4′-{2-butyl-4-[(2-mercapto-4,4-dimethylpentanoylamino)methyl]imidazol-1-ylmethyl}biphenyl-2-carboxylic     acid. MS m/z: [M+H]⁺ calcd for C₂₉H₃₇N₃O₃S, 508.26. found 508.2. -   (5-18)     4′-{2-butyl-4-[((S)-2-mercapto-4-methylpentanoylamino)methyl]imidazol-1-ylmethyl}biphenyl-2-carboxylic     acid. MS m/z: [M+H]⁺ calcd for C₂₈H₃₅N₃O₃S, 494.24. found 494.2. -   (5-19)     4′-{2-butyl-4-[((R)-2-mercapto-4-methylpentanoylamino)methyl]imidazol-1-ylmethyl}biphenyl-2-carboxylic     acid. MS m/z: [M+H]⁺ calcd for C₂₈H₃₅N₃O₃S, 494.24. found 494.2. -   (5-20)     4′-{2-butyl-4-[((S)-2-mercaptomethyl-3-methylbutyrylamino)methyl]imidazol-1-ylmethyl}biphenyl-2-carboxylic     acid. MS m/z: [M+H]⁺ calcd for C₂₈H₃₅N₃O₃S, 494.24. found 494.2. -   (5-21)     4′-{5-bromo-2-butyl-4-[((R)-1-mercaptomethyl-2-phenylethylcarbamoyl)-methyl]imidazol-1-ylmethyl}-3′-fluorobiphenyl-2-carboxylic     acid. MS m/z: [M+H]⁺ calcd for C₃₂H₃₃BrFN₃O₃S, 638.14. found 638.2.

Example 6

Following the procedures described in the examples above, and substituting the appropriate starting materials and reagents, compounds 6-1 to 6-25, having the following formula, were also prepared:

Ex. R² R³ X R⁵ R⁶ R⁷ 1 —COOH —(CH₂)₃CH₃ —CH₂NHC(O)- —CH₂CH[—CH₂— R⁶ and R⁷ taken cyclohexylene- O—(CH₂)₂—O— together to form NHC(O)— CH₃]COOH cyclopentyl 2 —COOH —(CH₂)₃CH₃ —CH₂NHC(O)— —C(O)NH(OH) benzyl H 3 —COOH —(CH₂)₃CH₃ —CH₂NHC(O)— —C(O)NH(OH) benzyl H CH₂NHC(O)— 4 —COOH —(CH₂)₃CH₃ —CH₂NHC(O)— —C(O)NH(OH) benzyl H CH₂—CH(COOH)— NHC(O)— 5 —COOH —(CH₂)₃CH₃ —CH₂NHC(O)— —CH₂SH benzyl H 6 —COOH —(CH₂)₃CH₃ —CH₂NHC(O)— —C(O)NH(OH) benzyl H (CH₂)₂NHC(O)CH₂CH(COOH)— NHC(O)— 7 —COOH —(CH₂)₃CH₃ —CH₂NHC(O)(CH₂)₂NHC(O)— —CH₂SH benzyl H 8 —COOH —(CH₂)₃CH₃ —CH₂NHC(O)(CH₂)₂NHC(O)CH₂NHC(O)— —CH₂SH benzyl H 9 —COOH —(CH₂)₃CH₃ —CH₂NHC(O)(CH₂)₂NHC(O)— —SH benzyl H 10 —COOH —(CH₂)₃CH₃ —CH₂NHC(O)(CH₂)₂NHC(O)— —C(O)NH(OH) benzyl H 11 —COOH —(CH₂)₃CH₃ —CH₂NHC(O)(CH₂)₂NHC(O)CH₂NHC(O)— —C(O)NH(OH) benzyl H 12 —COOH —(CH₂)₃CH₃ —CH₂NHC(O)(CH₂)₂NHC(O)- —CH₂CH[—CH₂— R⁶ and R⁷ taken cyclohexylene- O—(CH₂)₂—O— together to form NHC(O)— CH₃]COOH cyclopentyl 13 H —(CH₂)₃CH₃ —C(O)NH— —CH₂C(O)— benzyl H NH(OH) 14 H —(CH₂)₃CH₃ —CH₂NHC(O)— —SH —CH₂CH(CH₃)₂ H 15 H —(CH₂)₃CH₃ —CH₂NHC(O)— —SH benzyl H 16 H —(CH₂)₃CH₃ —CH₂NHC(O)— —C(O)NH(OH) —CH₂CH(CH₃)₂ H 17 H —(CH₂)₃CH₃ —CH₂NHC(O)— —C(O)NH(OH) benzyl H 18 H —(CH₂)₃CH₃ —C(O)NH— —CH₂C(O)— 2-bromobenzyl H NH(OH) 19 H —(CH₂)₃CH₃ —C(O)NH— —CH₂C(O)— 2- H NH(OH) methylbenzyl 20 H —(CH₂)₃CH₃ —C(O)NH— —CH₂C(O)— 2-trifluoro- H NH(OH) methylbenzyl 21 H —(CH₂)₃CH₃ —C(O)NH— —CH₂C(O)— —CH₂-furan-2- H NH(OH) yl 22 H —(CH₂)₃CH₃ —C(O)NH— —CH₂C(O)— —CH₂- H NH(OH) thiophen-3-yl 23 H —(CH₂)₃CH₃ —C(O)NH— —CH₂C(O)— —(CH₂)₂-phenyl H NH(OH) 24 H —(CH₂)₃CH₃ —C(O)NH— —CH₂COOH benzyl H 25 H —(CH₂)₃CH₃ —C(O)NH— —CH₂SH —CH₂CH(CH₃)₂ H 26 H —O—CH₂CH₃ —C(O)NH— —CH(OH)— benzyl H COOH 27 H —(CH₂)₂CH₃ —C(O)NH— —CH(OH)— benzyl H COOH

-   (6-1)     2-butyl-5-({[4-({1-[2-carboxy-3-(2-methoxyethoxy)propyl]cyclopentane-carbonyl}amino)cyclohexanecarbonyl]amino}methyl)-3-[2′-(1H-tetrazol-5-yl)-biphenyl-4-ylmethyl]-3H-imidazole-4-carboxylic     acid. MS m/z: [M+H]⁺ calcd for C₄₃H₅₆N₈O₈, 813.42. found 813.8. -   (6-2)     2-butyl-5-[(2-hydroxycarbamoyl-3-phenylpropionylamino)methyl]-3-[2′-(1H-tetrazol-5-yl)-biphenyl-4-ylmethyl]-3H-imidazole-4-carboxylic     acid. MS m/z: [M+H]⁺ calcd for C₃₃H₃₄N₈O₅, 623.27. found 623.4. -   (6-3)     2-butyl-5-{[2-(2-hydroxycarbamoyl-3-phenylpropionylamino)acetylamino]-methyl}-3-[2′-(1H-tetrazol-5-yl)-biphenyl-4-ylmethyl]-3H-imidazole-4-carboxylic     acid. MS m/z: [M+1-1]⁺ calcd for C₃₅H₃₇N₉O₆, 680.29. found 681.0. -   (6-4)     2-butyl-5-{[(R)-3-carboxy-3-(2-hydroxycarbamoyl-3-phenylpropionylamino)-propionylamino]methyl}-3-[2′-(1H-tetrazol-5-yl)-biphenyl-4-ylmethyl]-3H-imidazole-4-carboxylic     acid. MS m/z: [M+H]⁺ calcd for C₃₋₇H₃₉N₉O₈, 738.29. found 738.5. -   (6-5)     2-butyl-5-[(2-mercaptomethyl-3-phenylpropionylamino)methyl]-3-[2′-(1H-tetrazol-5-yl)-biphenyl-4-ylmethyl]-3H-imidazole-4-carboxylic     acid. MS m/z: [M+H]⁺ calcd for C₃₃H₃₅N₇O₃S, 610.25. found 610.0. -   (6-6)     2-butyl-5-({3-[(R)-3-carboxy-3-(2-hydroxycarbamoyl-3-phenylpropionyl-amino)propionylamino]propionylamino}methyl)-3-[2′-(1H-tetrazol-5-yl)-biphenyl-4-ylmethyl]-3H-imidazole-4-carboxylic     acid. MS m/z: [M+H]⁺ calcd for C₄₀H₄₄N₁₀O₉, 809.33. found 791.5     [M+H]⁺−18. -   (6-7)     2-butyl-5-{[3-(2-mercaptomethyl-3-phenylpropionylamino)propionylamino]-methyl}-3-[2′-(1H-tetrazol-5-yl)biphenyl-4-ylmethyl]-3H-imidazole-4-carboxylic     acid. MS m/z: [M+H]⁺ calcd for C₃₆H₄₀N₈O₄S, 681.29. found 681.4. -   (6-8)     5-({3-[2-(2-benzyl-3-mercaptopropionylamino)acetylamino]propionylamino}-methyl)-2-butyl-3-[2′-(1H-tetrazol-5-yl)biphenyl-4-ylmethyl]-3H-imidazole-4-carboxylic     acid. MS m/z: [M+H]⁺ calcd for C₃₈H₄₃N₉O₅S, 738.31. found 738.5. -   (6-9)     2-butyl-5-{[3-((S)-2-mercapto-3-phenylpropionylamino)propionylamino]-methyl}-3-[2′-(1H-tetrazol-5-yl)-biphenyl-4-ylmethyl]-3H-imidazole-4-carboxylic     acid. MS m/z: [M+H]⁺ calcd for C₃₅H₃₈N₈O₄S, 667.27. found 667.2. -   (6-10)     2-butyl-5-{[3-(2-hydroxycarbamoyl-3-phenylpropionylamino)propionylamino]-methyl}-3-[2′-(1H-tetrazol-5-yl)biphenyl-4-ylmethyl]-3H-imidazole-4-carboxylic     acid. MS m/z: [M+H]⁺ calcd for C₃₆H₃₉N₉O₆, 694.30. found 694.2. -   (6-11)     2-butyl-5-({3-[2-(2-hydroxycarbamoyl-3-phenylpropionylamino)acetylamino]-propionylamino}methyl)-3-[2′-(1H-tetrazol-5-yl)biphenyl-4-ylmethyl]-3H-imidazole-4-carboxylic     acid. MS m/z: [M+H]⁺ calcd for C₃₈H₄₂N₁₀O₇, 751.32. found 751.2. -   (6-12)     2-butyl-5-[(3-{[4-({1-[2-carboxy-3-(2-methoxyethoxy)propyl]-cyclopentanecarbonyl}amino)cyclohexanecarbonyl]amino}propionylamino)methyl]-3-[2′-(1H-tetrazol-5-yl)-biphenyl-4-ylmethyl]-3H-imidazole-4-carboxylic     acid. MS m/z: [M+H]⁺ calcd for C₄₆H₆₁N₉O₉, 884.46. found 884.4. -   (6-13)     2-butyl-1-[2′-(1H-tetrazol-5-yl)-biphenyl-4-ylmethyl]-1H-imidazole-4-carboxylic     acid ((S)-1-hydroxycarbamoylmethyl-2-phenylethyl)amide. MS m/z:     [M+H]⁺ calcd for C₃₂H₃₄N₈O₃, 579.28. found 579.4. -   (6-14) 2-mercaptomethyl-4-methylpentanoic acid     {2-butyl-1-[2′-(1H-tetrazol-5-yl)-biphenyl-4-ylmethyl]-1H-imidazol-4-ylmethyl}amide.     MS m/z: [M+H]⁺ calcd for C₂₉H₃₇N₇OS, 532.28. found 532.6. -   (6-15)     2-benzyl-N-{2-butyl-1-[2′-(1H-tetrazol-5-yl)biphenyl-4-ylmethyl]-1H-imidazol-4-ylmethyl}-3-mercaptopropionamide.     MS m/z: [M+H]⁺ calcd for C₃₂H₃₅N₇OS, 566.26. found 566.4. -   (6-16)     N-{2-butyl-1-[2′-(1H-tetrazol-5-yl)biphenyl-4-ylmethyl]-1H-imidazol-4-ylmethyl}-N′-hydroxy-2-isobutylmalonamide.     MS m/z: [M+H]⁺ calcd for C₂₉H₃₆N₈O₃, 545.29. found 545.5. -   (6-17)     2-benzyl-N-{2-butyl-1-[2′-(1H-tetrazol-5-yl)biphenyl-4-ylmethyl]-1H-imidazol-4-ylmethyl}-N′-hydroxymalonamide.     MS m/z: [M+H]⁺ calcd for C₃₂H₃₄N₈O₃, 579.28. found 580.4. -   (6-18)     2-butyl-1-[2′-(1H-tetrazol-5-yl)biphenyl-4-ylmethyl]-1H-imidazole-4-carboxylic     acid [(R)-2-(2-bromophenyl)-1-hydroxycarbamoylmethylethyl]amide. MS     m/z: [M+H]⁺ calcd for C₃₂H₃₃BrN₈O₃, 657.19. found 658.2. -   (6-19)     2-butyl-1-[2′-(1H-tetrazol-5-yl)-biphenyl-4-ylmethyl]-1H-imidazole-4-carboxylic     acid ((R)-1-hydroxycarbamoylmethyl-2-o-tolylethyl)amide. MS m/z:     [M+H]⁺ calcd for C₃₃H₃₆N₈O₃, 593.29. found 593.2. -   (6-20)     2-butyl-1-[2′-(1H-tetrazol-5-yl)-biphenyl-4-ylmethyl]-1H-imidazole-4-carboxylic     acid     [(R)-1-hydroxycarbamoylmethyl-2-(2-trifluoromethylphenyl)ethyl]amide.     MS m/z: [M+H]⁺ calcd for C₃₃H₃₃F₃N₈O₃, 647.26. found 647.2. -   (6-21)     2-butyl-1-[2′-(1H-tetrazol-5-yl)biphenyl-4-ylmethyl]-1H-imidazole-4-carboxylic     acid ((R)-2-furan-2-yl-1-hydroxycarbamoylmethylethyl)amide. MS m/z:     [M+H]⁺ calcd for C₃₀H₃₂N₈O₄, 569.25. found 569.2. -   (6-22)     2-butyl-1-[2′-(1H-tetrazol-5-yl)-biphenyl-4-ylmethyl]-1H-imidazole-4-carboxylic     acid ((R)-1-hydroxycarbamoylmethyl-2-thiophen-3-ylethyl)amide. MS     m/z: [M+H]⁺ calcd for C₃₀H₃₂N₈O₃S, 585.23. found 585.2. -   (6-23)     2-butyl-1-[2′-(1H-tetrazol-5-yl)-biphenyl-4-ylmethyl]-1H-imidazole-4-carboxylic     acid ((R)-1-hydroxycarbamoylmethyl-3-phenylpropyl)amide. MS m/z:     [M+H]⁺ calcd for C₃₃H₃₆N₈O₃, 593.29. found 593.4. -   (6-24)     (R)-3-({2-butyl-1-[2′-(1H-tetrazol-5-yl)-biphenyl-4-ylmethyl]-1H-imidazole-4-carbonyl}amino)-4-phenylbutyric     acid. MS m/z: [M+H]⁺ calcd for C₃₂H₃₃N₇O₃, 564.26. found 564.2. -   (6-25)     2-butyl-1-[2′-(2H-tetrazol-5-yl)-biphenyl-4-ylmethyl]-1H-imidazole-4-carboxylic     acid ((R)-1-mercaptomethyl-3-methylbutyl)amide. MS m/z: [M+H]⁺ calcd     for C₂₈H₃₅N₇OS, 518.26. found 518.4. -   (6-26)     (2R,3R)-3-({2-ethoxy-1-[2′-(1H-tetrazol-5-yl)-biphenyl-4-ylmethyl]-1H-imidazole-4-carbonyl}-amino)-2-hydroxy-4-phenylbutyric     acid. MS m/z: [M+H]⁺ calcd for C₃₀H₂₉N₇O₅, 568.22. found 568.6. -   (6-27)     (2R,3R)-2-hydroxy-4-phenyl-3-({2-propyl-1-[2′-(1H-tetrazol-5-yl)-biphenyl-4-ylmethyl]-1H-imidazole-4-carbonyl}amino)butyric     acid. MS m/z: [M+H]⁺ calcd for C₃₁H₃₁N₇O₄, 566.24. found 566.6.

Preparation 4 4-(4-Aminomethyl-2-butylimidazol-1-ylmethyl)naphthalene-1-carboxylic acid methyl ester (produced as a regioisomer mixture with 4-(5-aminomethyl-2-butylimidazol-1-ylmethyl)naphthalene-1-carboxylic acid methyl ester)

To a DMF (75 mL) solution of 4-bromomethylnaphthalene-1-carboxylic acid methyl ester (1.5 g, 5.3 mmol) was added 2-butyl-3H-imidazole-4-carbaldehyde (810 mg, 5.3 mmol) and potassium carbonate (810 mg, 5.8 mmol). The mixture was stirred at room temperature overnight until the reaction was complete. EtOAc (200 mL) was added and the organic was washed with 1M phosphoric acid (100 mL), saturated sodium bicarbonate (100 mL), and saturated aqueous NaCl (2×100 mL). The organic layer was dried over MgSO₄ for 10 minutes, filtered, and evacuated to dryness. The material was purified by silica gel chromatography (hexanes/EtOAc) to obtain a mixture of formyl regioisomers: the minor isomer, 4-(2-butyl-4-formylimidazol-1-ylmethyl)naphthalene-1-carboxylic acid methyl ester, and the major isomer, 4-(2-butyl-5-formylimidazol-1-ylmethyl)naphthalene-1-carboxylic acid methyl ester (3.0 g).

Minor isomer: Anal. HPLC: retention time=3.48 min: gradient conditions 10% solvent B/90% solvent A to 70% solvent B/30% solvent A over 6 min (solvent A=98% H₂O/2% MeCN/1.0 mL/L TFA; solvent B=90% MeCN/10% H₂O/1.0 mL/L TFA). (m/z): [M+H]⁺ calcd for C₂₁H₂₂N₂O₃, 351.2. found 351.1.

Major isomer: Anal. HPLC: retention time=3.45 min: gradient conditions 10% solvent B/90% solvent A to 90% solvent B/10% solvent A over 6 min (solvent A=98% H₂O/2% McCN/1.0 mL/L TFA; solvent B=90% McCN/10% H₂O/1.0 mL/L TFA) (m/z): [M+H]⁺ calcd for C₂₁H₂₂N₂O₃, 351.2. found 351.2.

This mixture of regioisomers (350 mg, 250 μmol) was combined with pyridine (5.0 mL). Water (2.0 mL) was added, followed by solid hydroxylamine hydrochloride (19 mg, 270 μmol). The mixture was stirred vigorously for 2 hours at room temperature until the reaction was complete. The resulting solids were filtered and dried to obtain a mixture of oxime regioisomers: the minor isomer, 4-[2-butyl-4-(hydroxyiminomethyl)imidazol-1-ylmethyl]naphthalene-1-carboxylic acid methyl ester, and the major isomer, 4-[2-butyl-5-(hydroxyiminomethyl)imidazol-1-ylmethyl]naphthalene-1-carboxylic acid methyl ester (300 mg).

Minor isomer: Anal. HPLC: retention time=3.40 min: gradient conditions 10% solvent B/90% solvent A to 70% solvent B/30% solvent A over 6 min (solvent A=98% H₂O/2% MeCN/1.0 mL/L TFA; solvent B=90% MeCN/10% H₂O/1.0 mL/L TFA). (m/z): [M+H]⁺ calcd for C₂₁H₂₃N₃O₃, 366.2. found 366.2.

Major isomer (5-CHNOH): Anal. HPLC: retention time=3.40 min: gradient conditions 10% solvent B/90% solvent A to 90% solvent B/10% solvent A over 6 min (solvent A=98% H₂O/2% MeCN/1.0 mL/L TFA; solvent B=90% MeCN/10% H₂O/1.0 mL/L TFA) (m/z): [M+H]⁺ calcd for C₂₁H₂₃N₃O₃, 366.2. found 366.2.

This mixture of regioisomers was placed in a flask (300 mg, 0.2 mmol) and sodium cyanoborohydride (58 mg, 920 μmol) and ammonium acetate (40 mg, 510 μmol) were added. The mixture was dissolved in MeOH (25 mL) and stirred for 15 minutes at room temperature. The mixture was cooled at 0° C. and titanium(III) chloride (95 mg, 620 μmol) was added in one portion.

The mixture was stirred at 0° C. for 10 minutes then allowed to reach room temperature. After 3 hours, an additional 20 eq. each of sodium cyanoborohydride and titanium(III) chloride were added to drive the reaction to completion. Ammonium hydroxide (58.2 mL, 1490 mmol) was added to precipitate out titanium salts. The mixture was then filtered through Celite® and evaporated to dryness. DCM (200 mL) was added to the solid and the solution was washed with 2×100 mL saturated aqueous NaCl. The organic layer was collected, dried over MgSO₄ for 10 minutes, filtered and evacuated to dryness. The crude product was purified by reverse phase chromatography (gradient of 10-70% over 90 min; flow rate 15 mL/min; detection at 280 nm). Pure fractions were combined and lyophilized in 50/50 H₂O/MeCN to obtain a mixture of the title regioisomers as a white solid TFA salt (100 mg).

Minor isomer, 4-(4-aminomethyl-2-butylimidazol-1-ylmethyl)naphthalene-1-carboxylic acid methyl ester: Anal. HPLC: retention time=3.83 min: gradient conditions 10% solvent B/90% solvent A to 70% solvent B/30% solvent A over 6 min (solvent A=98% H₂O/2% MeCN/1.0 mL/L TFA; solvent B=90% MeCN/10% H₂O/1.0 mL/L TFA). (m/z): [M+H]⁺ calcd for C₂₁H₂₅N₃O₂, 352.2. found 352.2.

Major isomer, 4-(5-aminomethyl-2-butylimidazol-1-ylmethyl)naphthalene-1-carboxylic acid methyl ester: Anal. HPLC: retention time=3.76 min: gradient conditions 10% solvent B/90% solvent A to 90% solvent B/10% solvent A over 6 min (solvent A=98% H₂O/2% McCN/1.0 mL/L TFA; solvent B=90% McCN/10% H₂O/1.0 mL/L TFA) (m/z): [M+H]⁺ calcd for C₂₁H₂₅N₃O₂, 352.2. found 352.2.

Example 7 4-{2-Butyl-4-[(2-hydroxycarbamoyl-4-methylpentanoylamino)methyl]imidazol-1-ylmethyl}naphthalene-1-carboxylic Acid

HATU (15 mg, 39 μmol) was added to a DMF (0.5 mL) solution of 2-(2,2-dimethylpropionyloxycarbamoyl)-4-methylpentanoic acid (11 mg, 43 μmol), and the solution was stirred for 5 minutes at room temperature. The regioisomer mixture of 4-(4-aminomethyl-2-butylimidazol-1-ylmethyl)naphthalene-1-carboxylic acid methyl ester and 4-(5-aminomethyl-2-butylimidazol-1-ylmethyl)naphthalene-1-carboxylic acid methyl ester (25 mg, 36 μmol) was added, followed by DIPEA (12 μL, 71 μmol) and the mixture was stirred for 30 minutes and then evacuated to dryness in vacuo.

Anal. LCMS retention time=3.3 min: gradient conditions 25% solvent B/75% solvent A to 95% solvent B/5% solvent A over 6 min (solvent A=98% H₂O/2% MeCN/1.0 mL/L TFA; solvent B=90% MeCN/10% H₂O/1.0 mL/L TFA) (m/z): [M+H]⁺ calcd for C₃₃H₄₄N₄O₆, 593.3. found 593.4.

To the crude coupled product was added a solution of 10 M NaOH (0.5 mL, 5 mmol) followed by McOH (1.0 mL, 20 mmol). The mixture was stirred at room temperature for 2 hours and AcOH (2.0 mL) was then added until the solution was no longer basic. The solution was then concentrated and purified by reverse phase chromatography. Pure fractions were combined and lyophilized in 50/50 H₂O/MeCN to provide the title compound as a white solid TFA salt (4 mg).

Anal. LCMS retention time=2.9 min: gradient conditions 25% solvent B/75% solvent A to 95% solvent B/5% solvent A over 6 min (solvent A=98% H₂O/2% MeCN/1.0 mL/L TFA; solvent B=90% MeCN/10% H₂O/1.0 mL/L TFA) (m/z): [M+H]⁺ calcd for C₂₇H₃₄N₄O₅, 495.3. found 495.2. ¹H NMR (D4-MeOH) 8.98 (1H, m), 8.15 (1H, m), 8.06 (1H, d), 7.68 (2H, m), 7.20 (1H, s), 7.11 (1H, d), 5.93 (2H, s), 4.37 (2H, s), 3.08 (1H, m), 3.00 (2H, m), 1.60 (4H, m), 1.46 (1H, m), 1.33 (2H, m), 0.86 (9H, m).

Example 8

Following the procedures described in the examples above, and substituting the appropriate starting materials and reagents, compounds 8-1 to 8-6, having the following formula, were also prepared:

Ex. X R⁵ R⁶ 1 —CH₂—NHC(O)— —C(O)NH(OH) benzyl 2 —CH₂—NHC(O)— —CH₂SH —CH₂CH(CH₃)₂ 3 —CH₂—NHC(O)— —CH₂SH benzyl 4 —C(O)NH— —CH₂C(O)NH(OH) 2-bromobenzyl 5 —C(O)NH— —CH₂C(O)NH(OH) benzyl 6 —C(O)NH— —CH₂COOH 2-bromobenzyl

-   (8-1)     4-{2-butyl-4-[(2-hydroxycarbamoyl-3-phenylpropionylamino)methyl]-imidazol-1-ylmethyl}naphthalene-1-carboxylic     acid. MS m/z: [M+H]⁺ calcd for C₃₀H₃₂N₄O₅, 529.24. found 529.2. -   (8-2)     4-{2-butyl-4-[(2-mercaptomethyl-4-methylpentanoylamino)methyl]-imidazol-1-ylmethyl}naphthalene-1-carboxylic     acid. MS m/z: [M+H]⁺ calcd for C₂₇H₃₅N₃O₃S, 482.24. found 482.2. -   (8-3)     4-{2-butyl-4-[2-mercaptomethyl-3-phenylpropionylamino)methyl]-imidazol-1-ylmethyl}naphthalene-1-carboxylic     acid. MS m/z: [M+H]⁺ calcd for C₃₀H₃₃N₃O₃S, 516.22. found 516.2. -   (8-4)     4-{4-[(R)-2-(2-bromophenyl)-1-hydroxycarbamoylmethylethylcarbamoyl]-2-butyl-imidazol-1-ylmethyl}naphthalene-1-carboxylic     acid. MS m/z: [M+H]⁺ calcd for C₃₀H₃₁BrN₄O₅, 607.15. found 607.2. -   (8-5)     4-[2-butyl-4-((R)-1-hydroxycarbamoylmethyl-2-phenylethylcarbamoyl)-imidazol-1-ylmethyl]naphthalene-1-carboxylic     acid. MS m/z: [M+H]⁺ calcd for C₃₀H₃₂N₄O₅, 529.24. found 529.5. -   (8-6)     4-{4-[(R)-2-(2-bromophenyl)-1-carboxymethylethylcarbamoyl]-2-butylimidazol-1-ylmethyl}naphthalene-1-carboxylic     acid. MS m/z: [M+H]⁺ calcd for C₃₀H₃₀BrN₃O₅, 592.14. found 593.2.

Preparation 5

(5-Propyl-4H-1,2,4-triazol-3-ylmethyl)carbamic Acid Benzyl Ester

Ethyl butyrimidate hydrochloride (1.3 g, 1.7 mmol) was dissolved in dry DCM (10 mL). The solution was washed with a saturated aqueous NaHCO₃ solution (10 mL), dried over MgSO₄, and the DCM carefully evaporated. Dry MeOH (5 mL) was added, followed by benzyloxycarbonylglycylhydrazide (1.9 g, 1 equiv). The mixture was stirred overnight at 60° C., and then allowed to cool to room temperature. The MeOH was evaporated and the residue purified by silica gel chromatography (1:1 EtOAc/hexanes) to afford the title compound (809 mg, 2.9 mmol).

Preparation 6 4′-Bromomethylbiphenyl-2-carboxylic Acid t-Butyl Ester

A solution of 4′-methylbiphenyl-2-carboxylic acid (48.7 g, 230 mmol) and thionyl chloride (150 mL) was stirred at room temperature. After 5.5 hours, the mixture was concentrated in vacuo. Excess thionyl chloride was removed by co-distillation with toluene to afford a yellow solid (52.6 g). The material was then dissolved in THF (500 mL) and cooled to 0° C. Potassium t-butoxide (15 g, 130 mmol) was added portion wise, followed by a 1M solution of potassium t-butoxide in THF (250 mL). Additional solid potassium t-butoxide (21.4 g, 100 mmol) was added and the mixture was stirred at 0° C. for 1.5 hours. The mixture was partitioned between EtOAc and water. The organic layer was washed with saturated aqueous NaCl, dried over MgSO₄, filtered, and concentrated to afford 4′-methylbiphenyl-2-carboxylic acid t-butyl ester (62.3 g) as a yellow oil, which was used directly in the next step.

Benzoyl peroxide (3.9 g, 16 mmol) was added to a solution of the above oil (62 g, 230 mmol) in benzene (800 mL) and NBS (41.2 g, 230 mmol) and was heated at reflux. After 4.5 hours, benzoyl peroxide (1 g) was added, followed by NBS (16 g, 66 mmol) 30 minutes later. The mixture was stirred for a total of 6 hours and then cooled, filtered, and concentrated in vacuo. The resulting residue was then crystallized from diethyl ether and hexane at 4° C. overnight to give the title compound (40.7 g) as a pale yellow solid.

¹H NMR (DMSO) δ (ppm) 1.1 (s, 9H), 4.6 (s, 2H), 7.1-7.6 (m, 8H).

Preparation 7 4′-[3-(aminomethyl)-5-propyl-1,2,4-triazol-1-ylmethyl]biphenyl-2-carboxylic acid t-butyl ester (produced as a regioisomer mixture with 4′-[5-(aminomethyl)-3-propyl-1,2,4-triazol-1-ylmethyl]biphenyl-2-carboxylic acid t-butyl ester)

(5-propyl-4H-1,2,4-triazol-3-ylmethyl)carbamic acid benzyl ester (100 mg, 370 μmol) was dissolved in dry DMF (1 mL) and added to a suspension of NaH (16 mg, 60% w/w, 1.1 equiv) in DMF (2 mL). The mixture was stirred at room temperature for 15 minutes, and then 4′-bromomethylbiphenyl-2-carboxylic acid t-butyl ester (126 mg, 1 equiv) was added. The mixture was stirred at room temperature for 2 hours, the reaction quenched with McOH (5 mL), and the mixture evaporated to dryness. The residue was dissolved in EtOAc (20 mL), washed with water (5 mL) and saturated aqueous NaCl (5 mL), dried over Na₂SO₄, and evaporated to afford a 2:1 mix of the 4′-[3-(benzyloxycarbonylaminomethyl)-5-propyl-[1,2,4]triazol-1-ylmethyl]biphenyl-2-carboxylic acid t-butyl ester and 4′-[5-(benzyloxycarbonylaminomethyl)-3-propyl-1,2,4-triazol-1-ylmethyl]biphenyl-2-carboxylic acid t-butyl ester. This mixture (192 mg, 350 μmol) was used without further purification.

The mixture (150 mg, 280 μmol) was dissolved in EtOH (7.5 mL) and added under nitrogen to Pd(OH)₂ (20% w/w on carbon, 50 mg). The mixture was stirred under hydrogen for 2 hours, then filtered and evaporated to afford a mixture of 4′-[3-(aminomethyl)-5-propyl-1,2,4-triazol-1-ylmethyl]biphenyl-2-carboxylic acid t-butyl ester and 4′-[5-(aminomethyl)-3-propyl-1,2,4-triazol-1-ylmethyl]biphenyl-2-carboxylic acid t-butyl ester (113 mg, 280 μmol). This mixture was used directly without further purification.

Example 9 4′-{3-[(2-Mercaptomethyl-4-methylpentanoylamino)methyl]-5-propyl-[1,2,4]triazol-1-ylmethyl}biphenyl-2-carboxylic Acid (R^(1a)═H and R^(5a)═H) and 4′-{5-[(2-Mercaptomethyl-4-methylpentanoylamino)methyl]-3-propyl-[1,2,4]triazol-1-ylmethyl}biphenyl-2-carboxylic Acid (R^(1a)═H and R^(5a)═H)

2-Acetylsulfanylmethyl-4-methylpentanoic acid (60 mg, 290 μmol) was dissolved in SOCl₂ (5 mL). The solution was stirred at room temperature for 1 hour, evaporated to dryness, and the residue dissolved in DCM (5 mL). D1PEA (0.1 mL, 2 equiv) was added, followed by a mixture of 4′-[3-(aminomethyl)-5-propyl-1,2,4-triazol-1-ylmethyl]biphenyl-2-carboxylic acid t-butyl ester and 4′-[5-(aminomethyl)-3-propyl-1,2,4-triazol-1-ylmethyl]biphenyl-2-carboxylic acid t-butyl ester (113 mg, 280 μmol). The mixture was stirred at room temperature for 16 hours, then evaporated to dryness. The residue was purified using reversed phase HPLC to afford a 2:1 regioisomer mixture of intermediates 4′-{3-[(2-acetylsulfanylmethyl-4-methyl-pentanoylamino)methyl]-5-propyl-1,2,4-triazol-1-ylmethyl}biphenyl-2-carboxylic acid t-butyl ester (R^(1a)═—C(CH₃)₃ and R^(5a)═—C(O)—CH₃) and 4′-{5-[(2-acetylsulfanylmethyl-4-methyl-pentanoylamino)methyl]-3-propyl-1,2,4-triazol-1-ylmethyl}biphenyl-2-carboxylic acid t-butyl ester (R^(1a)═—C(CH₃)₃ and R^(5a)═—C(O)—CH₃) (60 mg, 80 μmol) as TFA salts.

The regioisomer mixture of intermediates (60 mg, 80 μmol) was dissolved in formic acid (5 mL), stirred at room temperature for 16 hours, then evaporated to dryness. The residue was dissolved in MeOH (5 mL), and 1M aqueous NaOH (5 mL) was added. The solution was stirred at room temperature under nitrogen for 1 hour, then the reaction was quenched with AcOH (5 mL). The mixture was evaporated to dryness and the residue purified using reverse phase HPLC to afford 6.2 mg of the desired compound, 4′-{3-[(2-mercaptomethyl-4-methylpentanoylamino)methyl]-5-propyl-1,2,4-triazol-1-ylmethyl}biphenyl-2-carboxylic acid, and 5.8 mg of its regioisomer, 4′-{5-[(2-mercaptomethyl-4-methylpentanoylamino)methyl]-3-propyl-1,2,4-triazol-1-ylmethyl}biphenyl-2-carboxylic acid, both as TFA salts.

MS m/z: [M+H⁺] for 4′-{3-[(2-mercaptomethyl-4-methylpentanoylamino)methyl]-5-propyl-1,2,4-triazol-1-ylmethyl}biphenyl-2-carboxylic acid, calcd for C₂₇H₃₄N₄O₁S, 495.24. found 496.0.

Example 10

Following the procedures described in the examples above, and substituting the appropriate starting materials and reagents, compounds 10-1 to 10-2, having the following formula, were also prepared:

Ex. R^(5g) Compound name and mass spec 1 —CH₂—O— 4′-{3-[({1-[2-carboxy-3-(2-methoxyethoxy)- (CH₂)₂—O—CH₃ propyl]cyclopentanecarbonyl}amino)methyl]-5- propyl-[1,2,4]triazol-1-ylmethyl}biphenyl-2- carboxylic acid. MS m/z: [M + H]⁺ calcd for C₃₃H₄₂N₄O₇, 607.31; found 608.8. 2 benzyl 4′-[3-({[1-(2-carboxy-3-phenylpropyl)- cyclopentanecarbonyl]amino}methyl)-5-propyl- [1,2,4]triazol-1-ylmethyl]biphenyl-2-carboxylic acid. MS m/z: [M + H]⁺ calcd for C₃₆H₄₀N₄O₅, 609.30; found 609.

Example 11

Following the procedures described in the examples above, and substituting the appropriate starting materials and reagents, compounds 11-1 to 11-2, having the following formula, were also prepared:

Ex. R¹ Compound name and mass spec 1 —SO₂NH— (2R,3R)-3-{[1-(2′-Acetylsulfamoyl-biphenyl-4- C(O)CH₃ ylmethyl)-5-propyl-1H-[1,2,4]triazole-3-carbonyl] amino}-2-hydroxy-4-phenylbutyric acid. MS m/z: [M + H]⁺ calcd for C₃₁H₃₃N₅O₇S, 620.21; found 620.2. 2 tetrazole (2R,3R)-2-Hydroxy-4-phenyl-3-({5-propyl-1-[2′- (1H-tetrazol-5-yl)-biphenyl-4-ylmethyl]-1H-[1,2,4] triazole-3-carbonyl}amino)butyric acid. MS m/z: [M + H]⁺ calcd for C₃₀H₃₀N₈O₄, 567.24; found 567.2.

Preparation 8 2-(4-Bromobenzyl)-1-propyl-1H-imidazole-4-carboxylic Acid Ethyl Ester

4-Bromophenylacetonitrile (5.0 g, 25.5 mmol), hydroxylamine hydrochloride (3.9 g, 56.1 mmol), and sodium bicarbonate (5.1 g, 61.2 mmol) were dissolved in MeOH (250 mL, 6.2 mol) and water (40 mL, 2 mol). The mixture was heated at reflux overnight, cooled, and then concentrated to ˜50 mL. The residue was dissolved in DCM, washed with water and saturated aqueous NaCl, dried over MgSO₄, filtered and concentrated to yield 2-(4-bromophenyl)-N-hydroxyacetamidine (5.0 g).

2-(4-bromophenyl)-N-hydroxyacetamidine (5.0 g, 21.8 mmol) and ethyl propiolate (2.4 mL, 24.0 mmol) were dissolved in EtOH (100 mL, 2 mol). The mixture was heated to reflux for 7 hours, cooled and then concentrated. The residue was then dissolved in diphenyl ether (75 mL, 470 mmol), heated at 190° C. for 2 hours, cooled, combined with 400 mL of hexanes, and allowed to sit overnight. The solvent was decanted and the precipitant was dissolved in DCM and purified by column chromatography (0-10% MeOH in DCM) to yield 2-(4-bromobenzyl)-1H-imidazole-4-carboxylic acid ethyl ester (3.3 g).

Potassium carbonate (2.6 g, 18.7 mmol) and 1-iodopropane (669.7 μL, 6.9 mmol) were added to 2-(4-Bromobenzyl)-1H-imidazole-4-carboxylic acid ethyl ester (1.9 g, 6.2 mmol) dissolved in DMF (40 mL, 500 mmol). The mixture was heated at 60° C. for 5 hours. The mixture was cooled and then diluted with EtOAc (100 mL), washed with water and saturated aqueous NaCl (100 mL each), dried over MgSO₄, filtered and concentrated. The mixture was purified by column chromatography (20-60% EtOAc in Hexanes) to yield the desired product, 2-(4-bromobenzyl)-1-propyl-1H-imidazole-4-carboxylic acid ethyl ester (736 mg, 33.6% yield), and its regioisomer, 2-(4-bromobenzyl)-3-propyl-3H-imidazole-4-carboxylic acid ethyl ester (500 mg, 20% yield). The structures were confirmed by NMR.

Preparation 9 2-(1-Trityl-1H-tetrazol-5-yl)phenylboronic Acid

A solution of benzonitrile (60.0 g, 581.9 mmol, 1.00 equiv) in DMF (anhydrous) (600 mL) was placed in a flask that had been purged and maintained with an inert atmosphere of nitrogen. Ammonium chloride (40.5 g, 757.2 mmol, 1.30 equiv) was added, followed by the addition of lithium chloride (2.0 g, 47.2 mmol, 0.08 equiv). To the mixture was added azidosodium (49.4 g, 756.8 mmol, 1.30 equiv). The resulting solution was stirred overnight, while maintaining the temperature at 100° C. The solids were filtered out and washed with EtOAc. The filtrates were combined and concentrated under vacuum. The residue was dissolved in 350 ml of 10% NaOH aqueous solution. The resulting solution was extracted with 100 mL of EtOAc and the aqueous layers were combined. The pH value of the solution was adjusted to 2 with concentrated HCl. The solids were filtered out and dried over reduced pressure to yield 78.0 g (91%) of 5-phenyl-1H-tetrazole as a white solid. ES m/z: [M+H]⁺ calcd for C₇H₆N₄, 147.1. found 147.1.

A solution of 5-phenyl-1H-tetrazole (50.0 g, 342.1 mmol, 1.00 equiv) in DCM (dried) (150 mL) was placed in a flask that had been purged and maintained with an inert atmosphere of nitrogen. Triethylamine (45.0 g, 444.7 mmol, 1.30 equiv) at 0° C. was added to the mixture, followed by the addition of chlorotriphenylmethane (100.0 g, 358.7 mmol, 1.05 equiv) in several batches at 0° C. The resulting solution was stirred for 3 hours at room temperature. The solids were collected by filtration, and the filtrate cake was washed with cold EtOAc (1×100 mL) and water (3×300 mL). The solid was dried under reduced pressure to yield 125 g (94%) of 5-phenyl-1-trityl-1H-tetrazole as a white solid. ES m/z: [M+H]+ calcd for C₂₆H₂₀N₄, 389.1. found 389.1.

A solution of 5-phenyl-1-trityl-1H-tetrazole (70.0 g, 180.20 mmol, 1.00 equiv) in THF(dried) (560 mL) was placed in a flask that had been purged and maintained with an inert atmosphere of nitrogen. The mixture was cooled to −25° C. Butyllithium was added to quench the trace of water in the reaction mixture until the color of the mixture remained red for at least 5 minutes. Butyllithium (80.0 mL, 2.5 mol/L) was then added dropwise to the mixture over a period of about 40 minutes at a temperature below −25° C. The temperature of the mixture was raised to −5° C., and the mixture was stirred at −5° C. for 3 hours. The mixture was then cooled to −25° C. and triisopropyl borate (50.8 g, 270.11 mmol, 1.50 equiv) was added dropwise. The mixture was warmed to temperature in the range of 25-35° C. and stirred for 2 hours. The mixture was cooled again in the range of 0-5° C., and 3% aqueous acetic acid (470 mL) was slowly added over 30-40 minutes. The mixture was stirred for 30-40 minutes and then filtered. The crude product was washed with water (2×300 mL) and dried over reduced pressure. The crude product was then purified by re-crystallization from EtOAc (1 g/15 ml) to yield 54 g (69%) of the title compound as a white solid. ES m/z: [M+H]⁺ calcd for C₂₆H₂₁BN₄O₂ 433.1. found 433.1.

¹H-NMR (400 MHz, DMSO, 400 ppm): δ(ppm)=7.96 (br, 2H), 7.84-7.86 (m, 1H), 7.51-7.53 (m, 1H), 7.44-7.47 (m, 2H), 7.39-7.41 (m, 9H), 7.08-7.10 (m, 6H).

Preparation 10 1-Propyl-2-[2′-(1-trityl-1H-tetrazol-5-yl)-biphenyl-4-ylmethyl]-1H-imidazole-4-carboxylic

Acid

2-(4-Bromobenzyl)-1-propyl-1H-imidazole-4-carboxylic acid ethyl ester (300.0 mg, 854.1 μmol) and [2-(1-trityl-1H-tetrazol-5-yl)phenyl]boronic acid (1.1 g, 2.6 mmol) were combined with 1,1′-bis(diphenylphosphino)ferrocene-palladium(ii)dichloride dichlorometh (244 mg, 299 μmol), dicesium carbonate (974 mg, 3.0 mmol), toluene (11 mL, 100 mmol), and water (2.2 mL, 119.6 mmol), and stirred under nitrogen at 105° C. for 3 hours. The mixture was cooled to room temperature. Water (50 mL) was added, the mixture was extracted with EtOAc (2×50 mL), washed with saturated aqueous NaCl (50 mL), dried over MgSO₄, filtered and concentrated. The product was then purified by column chromatography (0-60% EtOAc in Hexanes) to yield 1-propyl-2-[2′-(1-trityl-1H-tetrazol-5-yl)-biphenyl-4-ylmethyl]-1H-imidazole-4-carboxylic acid ethyl ester (400 mg).

1-Propyl-2-[2′-(1-trityl-1H-tetrazol-5-yl)-biphenyl-4-ylmethyl]-1H-imidazole-4-carboxylic acid ethyl ester (400 mg, 607 μmol) was dissolved in THF (12.0 mL, 148 mmol). A solution of lithium hydroxide monohydrate (127 mg, 3.0 mmol) in water (4.0 mL, 222 mmol) was then added and the mixture was stirred at 40° C. for ˜40 hours to yield the title compound (380 mg).

Example 12 (2R,3R)-2-Hydroxy-4-phenyl-3-({1-propyl-2-[2′-(1H-tetrazol-5-yl)biphenyl-4-ylmethyl]-1H-imidazole-4-carbonyl}amino)butyric Acid (R⁵═—CH(OH)COOH)

HATU (120 mg, 317 μmol) and DIPEA (166 μL, 951 μmol) were added to a solution of 1-propyl-2-[2′-(1-trityl-1H-tetrazol-5-yl)-biphenyl-4-ylmethyl]-1H-imidazole-4-carboxylic acid (200.0 mg, 317.1 μmol) in DMF (3 mL, 40 mmol). The resulting mixture was stirred for 15 minutes before (2R,3R)-3-amino-2-hydroxy-4-phenylbutyric acid (61.9 mg, 0.317 mmol) was added. The mixture was stirred at 45° C. for 1.5 hours and was then diluted with water (10 mL), extracted with EtOAc (30 mL), washed with saturated aqueous NaCl (10 mL), and concentrated. The residue was dissolved in 1.5 mL each of dioxane and 4M HCl in dioxane and stirred at room temperature before being concentrated. The product was purified by preparative HPLC 10-60% ACN:H₂O with 0.5% TFA to yield the title compound as a TFA salt (6 mg; 89% purity). MS m/z: [M+H]⁺ calcd for C₃₁H₃₁N₇O₄, 566.24. found 566.6.

Compound 12-2 (R⁵═—CH₂SH), 1-propyl-2-[2′-(1H-tetrazol-5-yl)biphenyl-4-ylmethyl]-1H-imidazole-4-carboxylic acid ((R)-1-benzyl-2-mercaptoethyl)amide, was prepared in a similar manner. MS m/z: [M+H]⁺ calcd for C₃₀H₃₁N₇OS, 538.23. found 538.8.

Example 13

Following the procedures described in the examples above, and substituting the appropriate starting materials and reagents, compounds 13-1 to 13-8, having the following formula, can also be prepared:

Ex. R R¹ R³ R⁵ R⁶ 1 — tetrazole propyl —CH₂SH —CH₂CH(CH₃)₂ 2 — tetrazole ethoxy —CH(OH)COOH benzyl 3 — —SO₂NHC(O)CH₃ propyl —CH₂SH —CH₂CH(CH₃)₂ 4 — —SO₂NHC(O)CH₃ ethoxy —CH(OH)COOH benzyl 5 3-F —COOH propyl —CH₂SH —CH₂CH(CH₃)₂ 6 2-F —COOH ethoxy —C(O)NH(OH) benzyl 7 — tetrazole propyl —CH₂COOH benzyl 8 — tetrazole ethoxy —CH₂COOH benzyl

-   (13-1)     4-Propyl-5-[2′-(1H-tetrazol-5-yl)biphenyl-4-ylmethyl]-1H-imidazole-2-carboxylic     acid (1-mercaptomethyl-3-methylbutyl)amide -   (13-2)     3-({4-Ethoxy-5-[2′-(1H-tetrazol-5-yl)biphenyl-4-ylmethyl]-1H-imidazole-2-carbonyl}amino)-2-hydroxy-4-phenylbutyric     acid -   (13-3)     5-(2′-Acetylsulfamoylbiphenyl-4-ylmethyl)-4-propyl-1H-imidazole-2-carboxylic     acid (1-mercaptomethyl-3-methylbutyl)amide -   (13-4)     3-{[5-(2′-Acetylsulfamoylbiphenyl-4-ylmethyl)-4-ethoxy-1H-imidazole-2-carbonyl]amino}-2-hydroxy-4-phenylbutyric     acid -   (13-5)     3′-Fluoro-4′-[2-(1-mercaptomethyl-3-methylbutylcarbamoyl)-5-propyl-3H-imidazol-4-ylmethyl]biphenyl-2-carboxylic     acid -   (13-6)     4′-[5-Ethoxy-2-(1-hydroxycarbamoyl-2-phenylethylcarbamoyl)-3H-imidazol-4-ylmethyl]-2′-fluorobiphenyl-2-carboxylic     acid -   (13-7)     4-Phenyl-3-({4-propyl-5-[2′-(1H-tetrazol-5-yl)-biphenyl-4-ylmethyl]-1H-imidazole-2-carbonyl}amino)butyric     acid -   (13-8)     3-({4-Ethoxy-5-[2′-(1H-tetrazol-5-yl)biphenyl-4-ylmethyl]-1H-imidazole-2-carbonyl}amino)-4-phenylbutyric     acid

Example 14

Following the procedures described in the examples above, and substituting the appropriate starting materials and reagents, compounds 14-1 to 14-7, having the following formula, can also be prepared:

Ex. R R¹ R³ R⁵ R⁶ 1 — tetrazole propyl —CH₂SH —CH₂CH(CH₃)₂ 2 — tetrazole propyl —CH(OH)COOH benzyl 3 — —SO₂NHC(O)CH₃ propyl —CH₂SH —CH₂CH(CH₃)₂ 4 — —SO₂NHC(O)CH₃ propyl —CH(OH)COOH benzyl 5 3-F —COOH propyl —CH₂SH —CH₂CH(CH₃)₂ 6 2-F —COOH propyl —C(O)NH(OH) benzyl 7 — tetrazole propyl —CH₂COOH benzyl

-   (14-1)     1-Propyl-5-[2′-(1H-tetrazol-5-yl)biphenyl-4-ylmethyl]-1H-[1,2,4]triazole-3-carboxylic     acid (1-mercaptomethyl-3-methylbutyl)amide -   (14-2)     2-Hydroxy-4-phenyl-3-({1-propyl-5-[2′-(1H-tetrazol-5-yl)-biphenyl-4-ylmethyl]-1H-[1,2,4]triazole-3-carbonyl}amino)butyric     acid -   (14-3)     5-(2′-Acetylsulfamoylbiphenyl-4-ylmethyl)-1-propyl-1H-[1,2,4]triazole-3-carboxyl     i c acid (1-mercaptomethyl-3-methylbutyl)amide -   (14-4) 3-{[5-(2′-Acetyl     sulfamoyl-biphenyl-4-ylmethyl)-1-propyl-1H-[1,2,4]triazole-3-carbonyl]amino}-2-hydroxy-4-phenylbutyric     acid -   (14-5)     3′-Fluoro-4′-[5-(1-mercaptomethyl-3-methylbutylcarbamoyl)-2-propyl-2H-[1,2,4]triazol-3-ylmethyl]biphenyl-2-carboxylic     acid -   (14-6)     2′-Fluoro-4′-[5-(1-hydroxycarbamoyl-2-phenyl-ethylcarbamoyl)-2-propyl-2H-[1,2,4]triazol-3-ylmethyl]biphenyl-2-carboxylic     acid -   (14-7)     4-Phenyl-3-({1-propyl-5-[2′-(1H-tetrazol-5-yl)-biphenyl-4-ylmethyl]-1H-[1,2,4]triazole-3-carbonyl}amino)butyric     acid

Example 15

Following the procedures described in the examples above, and substituting the appropriate starting materials and reagents, compounds 15-1 to 15-8, having the following formula, can also be prepared:

Ex. R¹ R³ R⁵ R⁶ 1 tetrazole propyl —CH₂SH —CH₂CH(CH₃)₂ 2 tetrazole ethoxy —CH(OH)COOH benzyl 3 —SO₂NHC(O)CH₃ propyl —CH₂SH —CH₂CH(CH₃)₂ 4 —SO₂NHC(O)CH₃ ethoxy —CH(OH)COOH benzyl 5 —COOH propyl —CH₂SH —CH₂CH(CH₃)₂ 6 —COOH ethoxy —C(O)NH(OH) benzyl 7 tetrazole propyl —CH₂COOH benzyl 8 tetrazole ethoxy —CH₂COOH benzyl

-   (15-1)     4-Propyl-5-{6-[2-(1H-tetrazol-5-yl)phenyl]pyridin-3-ylmethyl}-1H-imidazole-2-carboxylic     acid (1-mercaptomethyl-3-methylbutyl)amide -   (15-2)     3-[(4-Ethoxy-5-{6-[2-(1H-tetrazol-5-yl)phenyl]pyridin-3-ylmethyl}-1H-imidazole-2-carbonyl)amino]-2-hydroxy-4-phenylbutyric     acid -   (15-3)     5-[6-(2-Acetylsulfamoylphenyl)pyridin-3-ylmethyl]-4-propyl-1H-imidazole-2-carboxylic     acid (1-mercaptomethyl-3-methylbutyl)amide -   (15-4)     3-({5-[6-(2-Acetylsulfamoylphenyl)pyridin-3-ylmethyl]-4-ethoxy-1H-imidazole-2-carbonyl}amino)-2-hydroxy-4-phenylbutyric     acid -   (15-5)     2-{5-[2-(1-Mercaptomethyl-3-methylbutylcarbamoyl)-5-propyl-3H-imidazol-4-ylmethyl]pyridin-2-yl}benzoic     acid -   (15-6)     2-{5-[2-(1-Benzyl-2-carboxy-2-hydroxyethylcarbamoyl)-5-ethoxy-3H-imidazol-4-ylmethyl]pyridin-2-yl}-benzoic     acid -   (15-7)     4-Phenyl-3-[(4-propyl-5-{6-[2-(1H-tetrazol-5-yl)phenyl]-pyridin-3-ylmethyl}-1H-imidazole-2-carbonyl)amino]butyric     acid -   (15-8)     3-[(4-Ethoxy-5-{6-[2-(1H-tetrazol-5-yl)phenyl]pyridin-3-ylmethyl}-1H-imidazole-2-carbonyl)amino]-4-phenylbutyric     acid

Assay 1 AT₁ and AT₂ Radioligand Binding Assays

These in vitro assays were used to assess the ability of test compounds to bind to the AT₁ and the AT₂ receptors.

Membrane Preparation from Cells Expressing Human AT₁ or AT₂ Receptors

Chinese hamster ovary (CHO-K1) derived cell lines stably expressing the cloned human AT₁ or AT₂ receptors, respectively, were grown in HAM's-F12 medium supplemented with 10% fetal bovine serum, 10 μg/ml penicillin/streptomycin, and 500 μg/ml geneticin in a 5% CO₂ humidified incubator at 37° C. AT₂ receptor expressing cells were grown in the additional presence of 100 nM PD123,319 (AT₂ antagonist). When cultures reached 80-95% confluence, the cells were washed thoroughly in PBS and lifted with 5 mM EDTA. Cells were pelleted by centrifugation and snap frozen in MeOH-dry ice and stored at −80° C. until further use.

For membrane preparation, cell pellets were resuspended in lysis buffer (25 mM Tris/HCl pH 7.5 at 4° C., 1 mM EDTA, and one tablet of Complete Protease Inhibitor Cocktail Tablets with 2 mM EDTA per 50 mL buffer (Roche cat. #1697498, Roche Molecular Biochemicals, Indianapolis, Ind.)) and homogenized using a tight-fitting Dounce glass homogenizer (10 strokes) on ice. The homogenate was centrifuged at 1000×g, the supernatant was collected and centrifuged at 20,000×g. The final pellet was resuspended in membrane buffer (75 mM Tris/HCl pH 7.5, 12.5 mM MgCl₂, 0.3 mM EDTA, 1 mM EGTA, 250 mM sucrose at 4° C.) and homogenized by extrusion through a 20 G gauge needle. Protein concentration of the membrane suspension was determined by the method described in Bradford (1976) Anal Biochem. 72:248-54. Membranes were snap frozen in MeOH-dry ice and stored at −80° C. until further use.

Ligand Binding Assay to Determine Compound Affinities for the Human AT₁ and AT₂ Angiotensin Receptors

Binding assays were performed in 96-well Acrowell filter plates (Pall Inc., cat. #5020) in a total assay volume of 100 μL with 0.2 μg membrane protein for membranes containing the human AT₁ receptor, or 2 μg membrane protein for membranes containing the human AT₂ receptor in Assay Buffer (50 mM Tris/HCl pH 7.5 at 20° C., 5 mM MgCl₂, 25 μM EDTA, 0.025% BSA). Saturation binding studies for determination of K_(d) values of the ligand were done using N-terminally Europium-labeled angiotensin-II ([Eu]AngII, H—(Eu—N¹)-Ahx-Asp-Arg-Val-Tyr-Ile-His-Pro-Phe-OH; PerkinElmer, Boston, Mass.) at 8 different concentrations ranging from 0.1 nM to 30 nM. Displacement assays for determination of pK_(i) values of test compounds were done with [Eu]AngII at 2 nM and 11 different concentrations of drug ranging from 1 pM to 10 μM. Drugs were dissolved to a concentration of 1 mM in DMSO and from there serially diluted into Assay Buffer. Non-specific binding was determined in the presence of 10 μM unlabeled angiotensin-II. Assays were incubated for 120 minutes in the dark, at room temperature or 37° C., and binding reactions were terminated by rapid filtration through the Acrowell filter plates followed by three washes with 200 μL ice cold wash buffer (50 mM Tris/HCl pH 7.5 at 4° C., 5 mM MgCl₂) using a Waters filtration manifold. Plates were tapped dry and incubated with 50 μl DELFIA Enhancement Solution (PerkinElmer cat. #4001-0010) at room temperature for 5 minutes on a shaker. Filter-bound [Eu]AngII was quantitated immediately on a Fusion plate reader (PerkinElmer) using Time Resolved Fluorescence (TRF). Binding data were analyzed by nonlinear regression analysis with the GraphPad Prism Software package (GraphPad Software, Inc., San Diego, Calif.) using the 3-parameter model for one-site competition. The BOTTOM (curve minimum) was fixed to the value for nonspecific binding, as determined in the presence of 10 μM angiotensin II. K_(i) values for drugs were calculated from observed IC₅₀ values and the K_(d) value of [Eu]AngII according to the Cheng-Prusoff equation described in Cheng et al. (1973) Biochem Pharmacol. 22(23):3099-108. Selectivities of test compounds for the AT₁ receptor over the AT₂ receptor were calculated as the ratio of AT₂K_(i)/AT₁K_(i). Binding affinities of test compounds were expressed as negative decadic logarithms of the K_(i) values (pK_(i)).

In this assay, a higher pK_(i) value indicates that the test compound has a higher binding affinity for the receptor tested. Exemplary compounds of the invention that were tested in this assay, typically were found to have a pK_(i) at the AT₁ receptor greater than or equal to about 5.0. For example, the compound of Example 1 was found to have a pK_(i) value greater than about 5.0.

Assay 2 In Vitro Assays for the Quantitation of Inhibitor Potencies (IC)) at Human and Rat NEP, and Human ACE

The inhibitory activities of compounds at human and rat NEP and human ACE were determined using in vitro assays as described below.

Extraction of NEP Activity from Rat Kidneys

Rat NEP was prepared from the kidneys of adult Sprague Dawley rats. Whole kidneys were washed in cold PBS and brought up in ice-cold lysis buffer (1% Triton X-114, 150 mM NaCl, 50 mM Tris pH 7.5; Bordier (1981) J. Biol. Chem. 256:1604-1607) in a ratio of 5 mL of buffer for every gram of kidney. Samples were homogenized using a polytron hand held tissue grinder on ice. Homogenates were centrifuged at 1000×g in a swinging bucket rotor for 5 minutes at 3° C. The pellet was resuspended in 20 mL of ice cold lysis buffer and incubated on ice for 30 minutes. Samples (15-20 mL) were then layered onto 25 mL of ice-cold cushion buffer (6% w/v sucrose, 50 mM pH 7.5 Tris, 150 mM NaCl, 0.06%, Triton X-114), heated to 37° C. for 3-5 minutes and centrifuged at 1000×g in a swinging bucket rotor at room temperature for 3 minutes. The two upper layers were aspirated off, leaving a viscous oily precipitate containing the enriched membrane fraction. Glycerol was added to a concentration of 50% and samples were stored at −20° C. Protein concentrations were quantitated using a BCA detection system with BSA as a standard.

Enzyme Inhibition Assays

Recombinant human NEP and recombinant human ACE were obtained commercially (R&D Systems, Minneapolis, Minn., catalog numbers 1182-ZN and 929-ZN, respectively). The fluorogenic peptide substrate Mca-BK2 (Mca-Arg-Pro-Pro-Gly-Phe-Ser-Ala-Phe-Lys(Dnp)-OH; Johnson et al. (2000) Anal. Biochem. 286: 112-118) was used for the human NEP and ACE assays, and Mca-RRL (Mca-DArg-Arg-Leu-(Dnp)-OH; Medeiros et al. (1997) Braz. J. Med. Biol. Res. 30:1157-1162) was used for the rat NEP assay (both from Anaspec, San Jose, Calif.).

The assays were performed in 384-well white opaque plates at room temperature using the respective fluorogenic peptides at a concentration of 10 μM in Assay Buffer (50 mM Tris/HCl at 25° C., 100 mM NaCl, 0.01% Tween-20, 1 μM Zn, 0.025% BSA). Human NEP and human ACE were used at concentrations that resulted in quantitative proteolysis of 5 μM of Mca-BK2 within 20 minutes at room temperature. The rat NEP enzyme preparation was used at a concentration that yielded quantitative proteolysis of 3 μM of Mca-RRL within 20 minutes at room temperature.

Test compounds were diluted to 12 concentrations from 10 μM to 20 pM in Assay Buffer. Assays were started by adding 25 μL of enzyme to 12.5 μL of test compound at each of the 12 concentrations. Test compounds were allowed to equilibrate with the enzyme for 10 minutes before 12.5 μL of the fluorogenic substrates were added to initiate the reaction. Reactions were terminated by the addition of 10 μL of 3.6% glacial acetic acid after 20 minutes of incubation.

For sulfhydryl-containing test compounds, the test compounds may be diluted in Assay Buffer containing a 400 μM concentration of tris(2-carboxyethyl)phosphine hydrochloride (Thermo Scientific, Rockford, Ill.) (TCEP). The test compounds are then allowed to reduce for 40 minutes at room temperature before adding the enzyme. Test compounds are then allowed to equilibrate with the enzyme for 20 minutes before adding the fluorogenic substrates. Reactions are terminated as above.

Plates were read on a fluorometer with excitation and emission wavelengths set to 320 nm and 405 nm, respectively. Raw data (relative fluorescence units) were normalized to % activity from the average high readings (no inhibition, 100% enzyme activity) and average low readings (full inhibition, highest inhibitor concentration, 0% enzyme activity) using three standard NEP and ACE inhibitors, respectively. Nonlinear regression of the normalized data was performed using a one site competition model (GraphPad Software, Inc., San Diego, Calif.). Data were reported as pIC₅₀ values.

Exemplary compounds of the invention that were tested in this assay, typically were found to have a pIC₅₀ for the NEP enzyme greater than or equal to about 5.0. For example, the compound of Example 1 has a pIC₅₀ value greater than or equal to about 7.0.

Assay 3 Pharmacodynamic (PD) Assay for ACE, AT₁, and NEP Activity in Anesthetized Rats

Male, Sprague Dawley, normotensive rats are anesthetized with 120 mg/kg (i.p.) of inactin. Once anesthetized, the jugular vein, carotid artery (PE 50 tubing) and bladder (URI-1 urinary silicone catheter) are cannulated and a tracheotomy is performed (Teflon Needle, size 14 gauge) to faciliate spontaneous respiration. The animals are then allowed a 60 minute stablization period and kept continuously infused with 5 mL/kg/h of saline (0.9%) throughout, to keep them hydrated and ensure urine production. Body temperature is maintained throughout the experiment by use of a heating pad. At the end of the 60 minute stabilization period, the animals are dosed intravenously (i.v.) with two doses of angiotensin (AngI, 1.0 μg/kg, for ACE inhibitor activity; AngII, 0.1 μg/kg, for AT₁ receptor antagonist activity) at 15 minutes apart. At 15 minutes post-second dose of angiotensin (AngI or AngII), the animals are treated with vehicle or test compound. Five minutes later, the animals are additionally treated with a bolus i.v. injection of atrial natriuretic peptide (ANP; 30 μg/kg). Urine collection (into pre-weighted eppendorf tubes) is started immediately after the ANP treatment and continued for 60 minutes. At 30 and 60 minutes into urine collection, the animals are re-challenged with angiotensin (AngI or AngII). Blood pressure measurements are done using the Notocord system (Kalamazoo, Mich.). Urine samples are frozen at −20° C. until used for the cGMP assay. Urine cGMP concentrations are determined by Enzyme Immuno Assay using a commercial kit (Assay Designs, Ann Arbor, Mich., Cat. No. 901-013). Urine volume is determined gravimetrically. Urinary cGMP output is calculated as the product of urine output and urine cGMP concentration. ACE inhibition or AT₁ antagonism is assessed by quantifying the % inhibition of pressor response to AngI or AngII, respectively. NEP inhibition is assessed by quantifying the potentiation of ANP-induced elevation in urinary cGMP output.

Assay 4 In Vivo Evaluation of Antihypertensive Effects in the Conscious SHR Model of Hypertension

Spontaneously hypertensive rats (SHR, 14-20 weeks of age) are allowed a minimum of 48 hours acclimation upon arrival at the testing site. Seven days prior to testing, the animals are either placed on a restricted low-salt diet with food containing 0.1% of sodium for sodium depleted SHRs (SD-SHR) or are placed on a normal diet for sodium repleted SHRs (SR-SHR). Two days prior to testing, the animals are surgically implemented with catheters into a carotid artery and the jugular vein (PESO polyethylene tubing) connected via a PE10 polyethylene tubing to a selected silicone tubing (size 0.020 ID×0.037 OD×0.008 wall) for blood pressure measurement and test compound delivery, respectively. The animals are allowed to recover with appropriate post operative care. On the day of the experiment, the animals are placed in their cages and the catheters are connected via a swivel to a calibrated pressure transducer. After 1 hour of acclimation, a baseline measurement is taken over a period of at least five minutes. The animals are then dosed i.v. with vehicle or test compound in ascending cumulative doses every 60 minutes followed by a 0.3 mL saline to clear the catheter after each dose. Data is recorded continuously for the duration of the study using Notocord software (Kalamazoo, Mich.) and stored as electronic digital signals. In some studies, the effects of a single intravenous or oral (gavage) dose are monitored for at least 6 hours after dosing. Parameters measured are blood pressure (systolic, diastolic and mean arterial pressure) and heart rate.

Assay 5 In Vivo Evaluation of Antihypertensive Effects in the Conscious DOCA-Salt Rat Model of Hypertension

CD rats (male, adult, 200-300 grams, Charles River Laboratory, USA) are allowed a minimum of 48 hours acclimation upon arrival at the testing site before they are placed on a high salt diet. One week after the start of the high salt diet, a DOCA-salt pellet (100 mg, 21 days release time, Innovative Research of America, Sarasota, Fla.) is implanted subcutaneously and unilateral nephrectomy is performed. On 16 or 17 days post DOCA-salt pellet implantation, animals are implanted surgically with catheters into a carotid artery and the jugular vein with a PE50 polyethylene tubing, which in turn was connected via a PE10 polyethylene tubing to a selected silicone tubing (size 0.020 ID×0.037 OD×0.008 wall) for blood pressure measurement and test compound delivery, respectively. The animals are allowed to recover with appropriate post operative care.

On the day of the experiment, each animal is kept in its cage and connected via a swivel to a calibrated pressure transducer. After 1 hour of acclimation, a baseline measurement is taken over a period of at least five minutes. The animals are then dosed i.v. with a vehicle or test compound in escalating cumulative doses every 60 minutes followed by 0.3 mL of saline to flush the catheter after each dose. In some studies, the effects of a single intravenous or oral (gavage) dose is tested and monitored for at least 6 hours after dosing. Data is recorded continuously for the duration of the study using Notocord software (Kalamazoo, Mich.) and stored as electronic digital signals. Parameters measured are blood pressure (systolic, diastolic and mean arterial pressure) and heart rate. For cumulative and single dosing, the percentage change in mean arterial pressure (MAP, mmHg) or heart rate (HR, bpm) is determined as described for Assay 4.

While the present invention has been described with reference to specific aspects or embodiments thereof, it will be understood by those of ordinary skilled in the art that various changes can be made or equivalents can be substituted without departing from the true spirit and scope of the invention. Additionally, to the extent permitted by applicable patent statues and regulations, all publications, patents and patent applications cited herein are hereby incorporated by reference in their entirety to the same extent as if each document had been individually incorporated by reference herein. 

What is claimed is:
 1. A compound of formula III:

wherein: r is 0, 1 or 2; Ar is selected from:

R¹ is selected from —COOR^(1a), —NHSO₂R^(1b), —SO₂NHR^(1d), —SO₂OH, —C(O)NH—SO₂R^(1c), —P(O)(OH)₂, —CN, —O—CH(R^(1e))—COOH, tetrazol-5-yl,

R^(1a) is H, —C₁₋₆alkyl, —C₁₋₃alkylenearyl, —C₁₋₃alkyleneheteroaryl, —C₃₋₇cycloalkyl, —CH(C₁₋₄alkyl)OC(O)R^(1aa), —C₀₋₆alkylenemorpholine,

R^(1aa) is —O—C₁₋₆alkyl, —O—C₃₋₇cycloalkyl, —NR^(1ab)R^(1ac), or —CH(NH₂)CH₂COOCH₃; R^(1ab) and R^(1ac) are independently H, —C₁₋₆alkyl, or benzyl, or are taken together as —(CH₂)₃₋₆—; R^(1b) is R^(1c) or —NHC(O)R^(1c); R^(1c) is —C₁₋₆alkyl, —C₀₋₆alkylene-O—R^(1ca), —C₁₋₅alkylene-NR^(1cb)R^(1cc), —C₀₋₄alkylenearyl, or —C₀₋₄alkyleneheteroaryl; R^(1ca) is H, —C₁₋₆alkyl, or —C₁₋₆alkylene-O—C₁₋₆alkyl; R^(1cb) and R^(1cc) are independently H or —C₁₋₆alkyl, or are taken together as —(CH₂)₂—O—(CH₂)₂— or —(CH₂)₂—N[C(O)CH₃]—(CH₂)₂—; R^(1d) is H, R^(1c), —C(O)R^(1c), or —C(O)NHR^(1c); R^(1e) is —C₁₋₄alkyl or aryl; R³ is selected from —C₁₋₁₀alkyl, —C₂₋₁₀alkenyl, —C₃₋₁₀alkynyl, —C₀₋₃alkylene-C₃₋₇cycloalkyl, —C₂₋₃alkenylene-C₃₋₇cycloalkyl, —C₂₋₃alkynylene-C₃₋₇cycloalkyl, —C₀₋₅alkylene-NR^(3a)—C₀₋₅alkylene-R^(3b), —C₀₋₅alkylene-O—C₀₋₅alkylene-R^(3b), —C₀₋₅alkylene-S—C₁₋₅alkylene-R^(3b), and —C₀₋₃alkylenearyl; where R^(3a) is H, —C₁₋₆alkyl, —C₃₋₇cycloalkyl, or —C₀₋₃alkylenearyl; and R^(3b) is H, —C₁₋₆alkyl, —C₃₋₇cycloalkyl, —C₂₋₄alkenyl, —C₂₋₄alkynyl, or aryl; X is —C₁₋₁₂alkylene-, where at least one —CH₂— moiety in the alkylene is replaced with a —NR^(4a)—C(O)— or —C(O)—NR^(4a)— moiety, where R^(4a) is H, —OH, or —C₁₋₄alkyl; R⁵ is selected from —C₀₋₃alkylene-SR^(5a), —C₀₋₃alkylene-C(O)NR^(5b)R^(5c), —C₀₋₃alkylene-NR^(5b)—C(O)R^(5d), —NH—C₀₋₁alkylene-P(O)(OR^(5e))₂, —O₀₋₃alkylene-P(O)OR^(5e)R^(5f), —C₀₋₂alkylene-CHR^(5g)—COOH, —C₀₋₃alkylene-C(O)NR^(5h)—CHR^(5i)—COOH, and —C₀₋₃alkylene-S—SR^(5j); R^(5a) is H or —C(O)—R^(5aa); R^(5aa) is —C₁₋₆alkyl, —C₀₋₆alkylene-C₃₋₇cycloalkyl, —C₀₋₆alkylenearyl, —C₀₋₆alkyleneheteroaryl, —C₀₋₆alkylenemorpholine, —C₀₋₆alkylenepiperazine-CH₃, —CH[N(R^(5ab))₂]— aa where aa is an amino acid side chain, -2-pyrrolidine, —C₀₋₆alkylene-OR^(5ab), —O—C₀₋₆alkylenearyl, —C₁₋₂alkylene-OC(O)—C₁₋₆ alkyl, —C₁₋₂alkylene-OC(O)—C₀₋₆alkylenearyl, or —O—C₁₋₂alkylene-OC(O)O—C₁₋₆alkyl; R^(5ab) is H or —C₁₋₆alkyl; R^(5b) is H, —OH, —OC(O)R^(5ba), —CH₂COOH, —O-benzyl, pyridyl, or —OC(S)NR^(5bb)R^(5bc); R^(5ba) is H, —C₁₋₆alkyl, aryl, —OCH₂-aryl, —CH₂O-aryl, or —NR^(5bb)R^(5bc); R^(5bb) and R^(5bc) are independently H or —C₁₋₄alkyl; R^(5c) is H, —C₁₋₆alkyl, or —C(O)—R^(5ca); R^(5ca) is H, —C₁₋₆alkyl, —C₃₋₇cycloalkyl, aryl, or heteroaryl; R^(5d) is H, —C₁₋₄alkyl, —C₀₋₃alkylenearyl, —NR^(5da)R^(5db), —CH₂SH, or —O—C₁₋₆alkyl; R^(5da) and R^(5db) are independently H or —C₁₋₄alkyl; R^(5e) is H, —C₁₋₆alkyl, —C₁₋₃alkylenearyl, —C₁₋₃alkyleneheteroaryl, —C₃₋₇cycloalkyl, —CH(CH₃)—O—C(O)R^(5ea),

R^(5ea) is —O—C₁₋₆alkyl, —O—C₃₋₇cycloalkyl, —NR^(5eb)R^(5ec), or —CH(NH₂)CH₂COOCH₃; R^(5eb) and R^(5ec) are independently H, —C₁₋₄alkyl, or —C₁₋₃alkylenearyl, or are taken together as —(CH₂)₃₋₆—; R^(5f) is H, —C₁₋₄alkyl, —C₀₋₃alkylenearyl, —C₁₋₃alkylene-NR^(5fa)R^(5fb), or —C₁₋₃alkylene(aryl)-C₀₋₃alkylene-NR^(5fa)R^(5fb); R^(5fa) and R^(5fb) are independently H or —C₁₋₄alkyl; R^(5g) is H, —OH, —C₁₋₆alkyl, —C₁₋₃alkylenearyl, or —CH₂—O—(CH₂)₂—O—CH₃; R^(5h) is H or —C₁₋₄alkyl; R^(5i) is H, —C₁₋₄alkyl, or —C₀₋₃alkylenearyl; and R^(5j) is —C₁₋₆alkyl, aryl, or —CH₂CH(NH₂)COOH; R⁶ is selected from —C₁₋₆alkyl, —CH₂O(CH₂)₂—O—CH₃, —C₁₋₆alkylene-O—C₁₋₆alkyl, —C₀₋₃alkylenearyl, —C₀₋₃alkyleneheteroaryl, and —C₀₋₃alkylene-C₃₋₇cycloalkyl; and R⁷ is H or is taken together with R⁶ to form —C₃₋₈cycloalkyl; wherein: each —CH₂— group in —(CH₂)_(r)— is optionally substituted with 1 or 2 substituents independently selected from —C₁₋₄alkyl and fluoro; each ring in Ar and each aryl and heteroaryl in R¹⁻³ and R⁵⁻⁶ is optionally substituted with 1 to 3 substituents independently selected from —OH, —C₁₋₆alkyl, —C₂₋₄alkenyl, —C₂₋₄alkynyl, —CN, halo, —O—C₁₋₆alkyl, —S—C₁₋₆alkyl, —S(O)—C₁₋₆alkyl, —S(O)₂—C₁₋₄alkyl, phenyl, —NO₂, —NH₂, —NH—C₁₋₆alkyl, and —N(C₁₋₆alkyl)₂, wherein each alkyl, alkenyl and alkynyl is optionally substituted with 1 to 5 fluoro atoms; each carbon atom in X is optionally substituted with one or more R^(4b) groups and one —CH₂— moiety in X may be replaced with a group selected from —C₃₋₈cycloalkylene-, —CR^(4d)═CH—, and —CH═CR^(4d)—; where R^(4b) is —C₀₋₅alkylene-COOR^(4c), —C₁₋₆alkyl, —C₀₋₁alkylene-CONH₂, —C₁₋₂alkylene-OH, —C₀₋₃alkylene-C₃₋₇cycloalkyl, 1H-indol-3-yl, benzyl, or hydroxybenzyl; R^(4c) is H or —C₁₋₄alkyl; and R^(4d) is —CH₂-2-thiophene or phenyl; each alkyl and each aryl in R¹, R³, R^(4a-4d), and R⁵⁻⁶ is optionally substituted with 1 to 7 fluoro atoms; or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof.
 2. The compound of claim 1, wherein r is
 1. 3. The compound of claim 1, wherein Ar is selected from:


4. The compound of claim 1, wherein R¹ is selected from —COOH, —NHSO₂R^(1b), —SO₂NHR^(1d), —SO₂OH, —C(O)NH—SO₂R^(1c), —P(O)(OH)₂, —CN, —O—CH(R^(1e))—COOH, tetrazol-5-yl,


5. The compound of claim 4, wherein R¹ is selected from —COOH, —SO₂NHR^(1d), and tetrazol-5-yl.
 6. The compound of claim 1, wherein R¹ is —COOR^(1a), where R^(1a) is —C₁₋₆alkyl, —C₁₋₃alkylenearyl, —C₁₋₃alkyleneheteroaryl, —C₃₋₇cycloalkyl, —CH(C₁₋₄alkyl)OC(O)R^(1aa), —C₀₋₆alkylenemorpholine,


7. The compound of claim 1, wherein R³ is —C₁₋₁₀alkyl or —C₀₋₅alkylene-O—C₀₋₅alkylene-R^(3b), where R^(3b) is H.
 8. The compound of claim 1, wherein X is —C₁₋₈alkylene-, 1 to 4 —CH₂— moieties in the alkylene are each replaced with —NHC(O)— or —C(O)NH—.
 9. The compound of claim 8, wherein X is: —C(O)NH—; —CH₂—NHC(O)—; —(CH₂)₂—NHC(O)—; —CH₂—NHC(O)-cyclohexylene-NHC(O)—; —CH₂—NHC(O)—CH₂—NHC(O)—; —CH₂—NHC(O)—CH₂—CH(COOH)—NHC(O)—; —CH₂—NHC(O)—(CH₂)₂—NHC(O)—; —CH₂—NHC(O)—(CH₂)₂—NHC(O)—CH₂—NHC(O)—; —CH₂—NHC(O)—(CH₂)₂—NHC(O)-cyclohexylene-NHC(O)—; or —CH₂—NHC(O)—(CH₂)₂—NHC(O)—CH₂—CH(COOH)—NHC(O)—.
 10. The compound of claim 1, wherein R⁵ is selected from —C₀₋₃alkylene-SR^(5a), —C₀₋₃alkylene-C(O)NR^(5b)R^(5c), —C₀₋₃alkylene-NR^(5b)—C(O)R^(5d), —NH—C₀₋₁alkylene-P(O)(OR^(5e))₂, —C₀₋₃alkylene-P(O)OR^(5e)R^(5f), —C₀₋₂alkylene-CHR^(5g)—COOH, and —C₀₋₃alkylene-C(O)NR^(5h)—CHR^(5i)—COOH; R^(5a) is H, R^(5b) is —OH, R^(5c)is H, R^(5d) is H, R^(5e) is H.
 11. The compound of claim 1, wherein R⁵ is selected from —C₀₋₃alkylene-SR^(5a), —C₀₋₃alkylene-C(O)NR^(5b)R^(5c), —C₀₋₃alkylene-NR^(5b)—C(O)R^(5d), —NH—C₀₋₁alkylene-P(O)(OR^(5e))₂, —O₀₋₃alkylene-P(O)OR^(5e)R^(5f), and —C₀₋₃alkylene-S—SR^(5j); where R^(5a) is —C(O)—R^(5aa); R^(5b) is H, —OC(O)R^(5ba), —CH₂COOH, —O-benzyl, pyridyl, or —OC(S)NR^(5bb)R^(5bc); R^(5e) is —C₁₋₆alkyl, —C₁₋₃alkylenearyl, —C₁₋₃alkyleneheteroaryl, —C₃₋₇cycloalkyl, —CH(CH₃)—O—C(O)R^(5ea),


12. The compound of claim 10, wherein R¹ is selected from —COOH, —NHSO₂R^(1b), —SO₂NHR^(1d), —SO₂OH, —C(O)NH—SO₂R^(1c), —P(O)(OH)₂, —CN, —O—CH(R^(1e))—COOH, tetrazol-5-yl,


13. The compound of claim 11, wherein R¹ is —COOR^(1a), where R^(1a) is —C₁₋₆alkyl, —C₁₋₃alkylenearyl, —C₁₋₃alkyleneheteroaryl, —C₃₋₇cycloalkyl, —CH(C₁₋₄alkyl)OC(O)R^(1aa), —C₀₋₆alkylenemorpholine,


14. The compound of claim 10, wherein R¹ is —COOR^(1a), and R^(1a) is —C₁₋₆alkyl, —C₁₋₃alkylenearyl, —C₁₋₃alkyleneheteroaryl, —C₃₋₇cycloalkyl, —CH(C₁₋₄alkyl)OC(O)R^(1aa), —C₀₋₆alkylenemorpholine,


15. The compound of claim 11, wherein R¹ is selected from —COOH, —NHSO₂R^(1b), —SO₂NHR^(1d), —SO₂OH, —C(O)NH—SO₂R^(1c), —P(O)(OH)₂, —CN, —O—CH(R^(1e))—COOH, tetrazol-5-yl,


16. The compound of claim 1, wherein R⁶ is —C₃₋₅alkyl, —C₀₋₁alkylenearyl, —C₀₋₁alkyleneheteroaryl, or —C₀₋₁alkylene-C₃₋₇cycloalkyl.
 17. The compound of claim 1, wherein R⁷ is H or is taken together with R⁶ to form cyclopentyl.
 18. The compound of claim 1, wherein: r is 1; Ar is selected from:

R¹ is —COOR^(1a), tetrazol-5-yl, or —SO₂NHR^(1d); R^(1a) is H or —C₁₋₆alkyl; R^(1d) is —C(O)R^(1c), where R^(1c) is —C₁₋₆alkyl; R³ is —C₁₋₁₀alkyl or —C₀₋₅alkylene-O—C₀₋₅alkylene-R^(3b), where R^(3b) is H; X is —C₁₋₈alkylene-, where at least one —CH₂— moiety in the alkylene is replaced with —NHC(O)— or —C(O)NH; R⁵ is —C₀₋₃alkylene-SR^(5a), —C₀₋₃alkylene-C(O)NHR^(5b), or —C₀₋₂alkylene-CHR^(5g)—COOH; R^(5a) H or —C(O)C₁₋₆alkyl; R^(5b) is —OH, —O-benzyl, or —OC(O)—C₁₋₆alkyl; R^(5g) is H, —OH, —C₁₋₃alkylenearyl, or —CH₂—O—(CH₂)₂—O—CH₃; R⁶ is —C₁₋₆alkyl, —C₀₋₃alkylenearyl, —C₀₋₃alkyleneheteroaryl, or —C₀₋₃alkylene-C₃₋₇cycloalkyl; R⁷ is H or is taken together with R⁶ to form —C₃₋₈cycloalkyl; each ring in Ar and each aryl in R⁶ is optionally substituted with an —C₁₋₆alkyl or halo group, and the alkyl is optionally substituted with 1 to 5 fluoro atoms; one carbon atom in X is optionally substituted with a —C₀₋₅alkylene-COOH group; one —CH₂— moiety in X may be replaced with —C₃₋₈cycloalkylene-; and each alkyl and each aryl in R¹, R³, and R⁵⁻⁶ is optionally substituted with 1 to 7 fluoro atoms.
 19. The compound of claim 18, having formula IIIa:

where Ar is:

R¹ is —COOR^(1a), tetrazol-5-yl, or —SO₂NHR^(1d); R^(1a) is H or —C₁₋₆alkyl; R^(1d) is —C(O)R^(1c), where R^(1c) is —C₁₋₆alkyl; R³ is —C₁₋₁₀alkyl; X is —C₁₋₆alkylene-, where at least one —CH₂— moiety in the alkylene is replaced with —NHC(O)— or —C(O)NH—; R⁵ is —C₀₋₃alkylene-SR^(5a), —C₀₋₃alkylene-C(O)NHR^(5b), or —C₀₋₂alkylene-CHR^(5g)—COOH; R^(5a) is H or —C(O)C₁₋₆alkyl; R^(5b) is —OH or —O-benzyl; R^(5g) is —OH, —C₁₋₃alkylenearyl, or —CH₂—O—(CH₂)₂—O—CH₃; R⁶ is —C₁₋₆alkyl or —C₀₋₃alkylenearyl; R⁷ is H or is taken together with R⁶ to form —C₃₋₈cycloalkyl; and each alkyl and each aryl in R¹, R³, and R⁵⁻⁶ is optionally substituted with 1 to 7 fluoro atoms.
 20. A pharmaceutical composition comprising the compound of claim 1 and a pharmaceutically acceptable carrier.
 21. The pharmaceutical composition of claim 20, further comprising a second therapeutic agent selected from the group consisting of diuretics, β₁ adrenergic receptor blockers, calcium channel blockers, angiotensin-converting enzyme inhibitors, AT₁ receptor antagonists, neprilysin inhibitors, non-steroidal anti-inflammatory agents, prostaglandins, anti-lipid agents, anti-diabetic agents, anti-thrombotic agents, renin inhibitors, endothelin receptor antagonists, endothelin converting enzyme inhibitors, aldosterone antagonists, angiotensin-converting enzyme/neprilysin inhibitors, vasopressin receptor antagonists, and combinations thereof. 